GPS Post-Processing Software

Spectrum Survey

Reference Manual

GPS SURVEY SOFTWARE

SPECTRUM SURVEY

Reference Manual

Part Number 750-1-0001 Rev 5

POINT, Inc. welcomes written communications regarding

its products: POINT, Inc., 16900 W 118th Terr., Olathe,
Kansas 66061 U.S.A.
Sokkia is a trademark of Sokkia Co. Ltd.
Spectrum, SDR and Electronic Field Book are
registered trademarks of POINT, Inc.
Radian and Stratus are trademarks of POINT, Inc.
OSGM91 registered trademark and OSTN02 is a trademark
of Ordnance Survey, the national mapping agency of Great
Britain.
De Min geoid model was made available by the
Meetkundige Dienst Rijkswaterstaat, the national survey
department of The Netherlands.
All other product names are trademarks of their respective
holders.

Copyright Acknowledgment
The software in this product is protected by copyright and
all rights are reserved by Sokkia. Lawful users of this
program are licensed solely for the purpose of executing the programs. Failure to comply with the
provisions of this products license agreement is a violation of copyright law.
This manual is protected by copyright and all rights are reserved. Additional copies of the Reference
Manual, product number 750-1-0001, may be purchased from the Authorized Dealer from which
Spectrum Survey was purchased.
While a great deal of effort has gone into the preparation of this manual, no liability is accepted for any
omissions or errors contained herein. Sokkia makes no representations or warranties with respect to
the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for
any particular purpose.

2002 POINT, Inc., October 2002

750-1-0001 Rev 5

Contents
Section 1 - Introduction and Basic Operations
Chapter 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10

Chapter 2
2.1
2.2

Chapter 3
3.1

Welcome

1-1

Whats New in V3.24................................................................................................1-1

System and Windows Requirements.....................................................................1-2
Install Spectrum Survey...........................................................................................1-2
1.3.1
Upgrade instructions .................................................................................1-2
Start Spectrum Survey .............................................................................................1-3
1.4.1
Security key (dongle) .................................................................................1-4
Exit Spectrum Survey...............................................................................................1-4
How to Get Technical Support ...............................................................................1-5
Documentation Conventions ..................................................................................1-6
Terms ..........................................................................................................................1-7
On-Line Help.............................................................................................................1-7
Additional Resources ...............................................................................................1-8

Quick Start

2-1

General Work Flow ..................................................................................................2-1

Quick Start .................................................................................................................2-2

Basic Operations

3-1

Learn the Desktop ....................................................................................................3-1

3.1.1
Menu bar .....................................................................................................3-1
3.1.2
Shortcut menus...........................................................................................3-3
3.1.3
Toolbar .........................................................................................................3-4
3.1.4
Status bar .....................................................................................................3-4

Spectrum Survey

3.2

3.3
3.4
3.5

3.6

Chapter 4
4.1

4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7

Plan View ................................................................................................................... 3-6

3.2.1
Learn the plan view ...................................................................................3-7
3.2.2
Display graphics.........................................................................................3-8
3.2.3
View controls ..............................................................................................3-9
3.2.4
Select and edit data .................................................................................. 3-11
Dialog Boxes ............................................................................................................ 3-11
Customize Spectrum Survey................................................................................. 3-11
3.4.1
Options ...................................................................................................... 3-12
Manage Reports ...................................................................................................... 3-21
3.5.1
Generate reports ....................................................................................... 3-22
3.5.2
Save reports...............................................................................................3-22
3.5.3
Open report files....................................................................................... 3-23
3.5.4
Edit reports................................................................................................ 3-23
3.5.5
Close reports ............................................................................................. 3-24
Printing..................................................................................................................... 3-24

Communications

4-1

Stratus Communication Notes................................................................................4-1

4.1.1
Operating system .......................................................................................4-1
4.1.2
Installing your IrDA adapter....................................................................4-2
Connect to the Device ..............................................................................................4-2
Select a Destination Directory.................................................................................4-3
Device Transfer Options ..........................................................................................4-3
Transfer Files .............................................................................................................4-4
Disk/Memory Settings ............................................................................................4-5
Status ..........................................................................................................................4-6

Section 2 - Project Setup

Chapter 5
5.1
5.2

5.3
5.4

ii

Create a Project

5-1

Welcome Dialog Box ................................................................................................5-1

Create a New Project................................................................................................5-2
5.2.1
General tab ..................................................................................................5-3
5.2.2
Coordinates/time tab ................................................................................5-5
5.2.3
Adjustment tab ...........................................................................................5-6
5.2.4
Blunder detection tab.................................................................................5-7
Project Startup ......................................................................................................... 5-10
Open an Existing Project ....................................................................................... 5-12

Spectrum Survey

5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8

Chapter 6
6.1
6.2

6.3
6.4

Chapter 7
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4

Edit the Project Settings ......................................................................................... 5-13

Import Data ............................................................................................................. 5-14
Save a Project........................................................................................................... 5-14
Edit an Existing Project .......................................................................................... 5-15

Import Data Into a Project

6-1

Notes...........................................................................................................................6-3
Import New Observations & Ephemeris...............................................................6-4
6.2.1
Import file types .........................................................................................6-6
6.2.2
Import messages....................................................................................... 6-10
6.2.3
File import considerations ...................................................................... 6-12
Observations Tab .................................................................................................... 6-13
Ephemeris Tab ........................................................................................................ 6-15

Convert to RINEX

7-1

Data Not in Project ...................................................................................................7-2

Data in Project ...........................................................................................................7-2
Project File RINEX Header......................................................................................7-3
Standard RINEX Header .........................................................................................7-5

Section 3 - Edit and Process Data

Chapter 8
8.1
8.2
8.3

8.4

8.5

Edit Data

8-1

Edit Coordinate System ...........................................................................................8-1

Edit the Plan View ....................................................................................................8-2
Control Points ...........................................................................................................8-2
8.3.1
Add a point .................................................................................................8-3
8.3.2
Add multiple points...................................................................................8-4
8.3.3
Edit a point ..................................................................................................8-5
8.3.4
Delete a point ..............................................................................................8-5
8.3.5
Change the coordinate system .................................................................8-5
Edit Raw Data ...........................................................................................................8-6
8.4.1
Point editor..................................................................................................8-6
8.4.2
Rover editor ..............................................................................................8-20
Edit Session Time.................................................................................................... 8-21

Spectrum Survey

iii

8.6

Chapter 9
9.1
9.2
9.3

Select Raw Data for Processing ............................................................................ 8-23

8.6.1
Point selection........................................................................................... 8-23
8.6.2
Rover selection.......................................................................................... 8-28

Process Data

9-1

Initial Processing.......................................................................................................9-1
Reprocessing..............................................................................................................9-1
9.2.1
Define combinations ..................................................................................9-2
Vectors & Trajectories ..............................................................................................9-4
9.3.1
Delete vectors & trajectories .....................................................................9-5
9.3.2
Edit vectors..................................................................................................9-6
9.3.3
New vector occupation............................................................................ 9-12
9.3.4
Edit trajectories ......................................................................................... 9-14
9.3.5
New trajectory .......................................................................................... 9-19
9.3.6
Process parameters .................................................................................. 9-20
9.3.7
Select objects ............................................................................................. 9-31
9.3.8
Process .......................................................................................................9-34

Section 4 - Analyze and Troubleshoot Data

Chapter 10 Analyze Process Results
10.1
10.2

10.3
10.4

10.5

10.6

iv

10-1

Process Summary ................................................................................................... 10-1

Raw Observations................................................................................................... 10-4
10.2.1 Number of observed satellites plot........................................................ 10-6
10.2.2 Observed satellites plot ........................................................................... 10-9
Point List ................................................................................................................10-10
Processed Vectors .................................................................................................10-12
10.4.1 Vector summary .....................................................................................10-14
10.4.2 Vector residuals ......................................................................................10-18
10.4.3 Repeat vector summary ........................................................................10-20
Processed Trajectories ..........................................................................................10-21
10.5.1 Trajectory summary...............................................................................10-23
10.5.2 Trajectory residuals................................................................................10-27
Error Reporting Options......................................................................................10-28
10.6.1 Single point .............................................................................................10-29
10.6.2 Differential ..............................................................................................10-29
10.6.3 Ephemeris................................................................................................10-30

Spectrum Survey

Chapter 11 Troubleshoot With Loop Closures

11.1
11.2

11-1

Perform Loop Closures.......................................................................................... 11-2

Interpret the Table .................................................................................................. 11-5
11.2.1 Print/save loop report.............................................................................11-6

Section 5 - Adjust and Export Data

Chapter 12 Adjust a Network
12.1
12.2
12.3

12.4
12.5
12.6

Work with a Network ............................................................................................ 12-1

Steps to Adjust a Network .................................................................................... 12-1
12.2.1 Running the adjustment.......................................................................... 12-2
Before Adjusting your Data .................................................................................. 12-4
12.3.1 Select data.................................................................................................. 12-4
12.3.2 Fix a point.................................................................................................. 12-5
12.3.3 Change regional settings......................................................................... 12-6
12.3.4 Apply adjustment settings ...................................................................... 12-6
12.3.5 Apply weight settings ...........................................................................12-12
12.3.6 Review point and vector data ..............................................................12-14
12.3.7 Review the plan view ............................................................................12-14
Calculate the Network Adjustment ...................................................................12-14
View Residuals......................................................................................................12-16
Generate Reports ..................................................................................................12-16

Chapter 13 Analyze Adjustment Results

13.1
13.2
13.3

13-1

Manage Adjustment Reports ................................................................................ 13-1

13.1.1 Residual display options......................................................................... 13-1
Interpret Reports..................................................................................................... 13-3
Network Adjustment Reports ..............................................................................13-4
13.3.1 Adjustment reports .................................................................................. 13-4
13.3.2 Residuals reports ....................................................................................13-17
13.3.3 Adjustment error log .............................................................................13-19

Chapter 14 Export Results

14.1

12-1

14-1

Export Vector Solutions and Trajectory Points .................................................. 14-2

14.1.1 *.SDR format ............................................................................................. 14-5
14.1.2 *.IOB format ..............................................................................................14-7

Spectrum Survey

14.2

14.3

Export Trajectory Solutions.................................................................................14-11

14.2.1 Export to ASCII ......................................................................................14-14
14.2.2 Export to IMap........................................................................................14-14
14.2.3 IMAP export file .....................................................................................14-18
Export Point Solutions .........................................................................................14-19
14.3.1 Exporting ground coordinates .............................................................14-22
14.3.2 Export dialog box ...................................................................................14-24

Section 6 - Appendices
Appendix A Spectrum Survey Concepts
A.1
A.2
A.3
A.4
A.5

Point...........................................................................................................................A-1
Vector ........................................................................................................................A-1
A.2.1 How do you create a vector? ...................................................................A-1
Rover .........................................................................................................................A-2
Trajectory ..................................................................................................................A-2
A.4.1 How do you create a trajectory? .............................................................A-2
Points in a Trajectory...............................................................................................A-3

Appendix B Glossary of Terms & Acronyms

Index

vi

A-1

B-1
I-1

Spectrum Survey

Section 1 - Introduction and Basic Operations

This section is an introduction to Spectrum Survey. Reading this section will aid you in using
Spectrum Survey and understanding the softwares basic functions.
As well, this section explains how to communicate between the software and your PC or receiver.
At the end of this section, you should understand how to navigate in Spectrum Survey, use the
tools on the main Spectrum Survey desktop, and have an understanding of all basic Spectrum
Survey operations and communication functionality.
Section 1 includes:

Welcome

Quick Start

Basic Operations

Communications

Chapter 1

Welcome
Welcome to the Spectrum Survey Reference Manual, which provides you with
comprehensive information about your Spectrum Survey software.
Spectrum Survey is included in the Spectrum Survey Suite software package
and is a powerful link between you and any job. Spectrum Surveys
comprehensive software features let you manage and process data, yet it
remains simply to use.
With its fully functional Windows-based Graphical User Interface (GUI),
Spectrum Survey is easy for beginners and experts alike.

1.1

Whats New in V3.24

Spectrum Survey V3.24 provides you with the following additional
functionality:

Spectrum Survey

New geoids are included in the install: Canadian Geoid 2000, UK

OSGM02, Northern Ireland, Republic of Ireland

Ability to communicate with and download data files from the GSR2600
GPS receiver

Ability to import RINEX V2.10 data files

Define Combinations default behaviour was changed so that vectors

within trajectories are not automatically generated

Ability to force fixed integer solutions for vectors that fail the IT (integer
travel reliability test)

Improved workflow for importing data into a project

Files without site names are treated as static sites by default on import

Added vector standard deviation in process summary

1-1

Chapter 1

1.2

Welcome

System and Windows Requirements

Run Spectrum Survey on a PC that meets this recommended minimum
configuration:
Minimum PC Configuration to Run Spectrum Survey

1.3

Microsoft Windows (9x, NT, ME, XP, or 2000) user interface

Pentium class

VGA display

16 MB RAM memory

Hard disk with 64 MB free; extra space required for data

storage

One serial port

Windows-compatible mouse or pointing device

One parallel port

Install Spectrum Survey

Use the SETUP program on your Sokkia Complete Product CD to install the
Spectrum Survey program. Please refer to your Sokkia Complete Product CD
for installation instructions.
Spectrum Survey will install on your machine, in the location you choose, in
the \Sokkia\Spectrum Survey Version 3.2 folder.

1.3.1

Upgrade instructions
If you have Spectrum Survey V3.0 or newer, you can upgrade Spectrum
Survey to V3.24 by downloading the upgrade files from Sokkias Website at
http:\\www.sokkia.com. If your Spectrum Survey software is older than
V3.0, it cannot be upgraded. Use the full install on the Complete Product CD.
To upgrade, follow these steps:
1.

Upgrade from V3.xx to V3.20

2.

Upgrade from V3.2x to V3.24

If your version of Spectrum Survey software is already at V3.2x, then you can
skip step 1.

1-2

Spectrum Survey

Welcome

1.4

Chapter 1

Start Spectrum Survey

To run Spectrum Survey, make sure your PC meets the minimum
requirements in Section 1.2, System and Windows Requirements, Page 1-2.
If you installed Spectrum Survey in its default location, run it by choosing
from the Windows Start menu:
Programs | Sokkia | Spectrum Survey Version 3.2
Otherwise, select the path where you installed Spectrum Survey.
Spectrum Survey can also be launched by double-clicking the Spectrum
Survey desktop icon (if you created one).

Note: If you purchased an L1-only version of Spectrum Survey software,

or if you have forgotten to attach your security dongle to your computer,
a warning message stating that Spectrum Survey can currently process L!
GPS data only will appear.

If applicable, attach your dongle to your PC now. To avoid seeing this

message in the future, you may select the Do not perform this check again
check box. Click <OK> to close the warning message.

Spectrum Survey

1-3

Chapter 1

1.4.1

Welcome

Security key (dongle)

The following explains using the dongle with the following receivers:
Radian IS.......... For Spectrum Survey to function with this receiver, you need
to have the security key connected to your PCs parallel port
at all times. The software checks for the presence of the key,
and if none is detected, a warning message is displayed. You
can then request that the key be checked again, or cancel the
check and terminate the application
Stratus............... Access to this receivers functionality does not require a
security key

1.5

Exit Spectrum Survey

To exit Spectrum Survey, choose one of the following methods:

Click <Exit>

in the upper right-hand corner of the main window

Select File | Exit from the main menu

Press <Alt> + <F4>

If a project file is open and has been edited, you will be prompted to save the
changes before the project file is closed. Press one of the following buttons:
<Yes>................. to quit and save the changes
<No> ................. to quit and discard any changes
<Cancel> .......... to exit the dialog box (For example, if you want to save the
project with a different name).

1-4

Spectrum Survey

Welcome

1.6

Chapter 1

How to Get Technical Support

Technical support for this product is available from the distributor where
you purchased it. You also may contact one of the Sokkia subsidiaries listed
below. Sokkia welcomes written communications regarding its products; use
the address on the back of the title page of this manual.
Europe
Sokkia B.V.
Businesspark De Vaart
Damsluisweg 1, 1332 EA Almere
P.O. Box 1292, 1300 BG Almere
The Netherlands
Phone 036-53-22-880
Fax 036-53-26-241

Australia
Sokkia Pty. Ltd.
Rydalmere Metro Centre
Unit 29,38-46 South Street
Rydalmere NSW 2116
Australia
Phone 61-2-9638-0055
Fax 61-2-9638-3933

USA
Sokkia Corporation
16900 W 118th Terr
Olathe, KS, USA 66061
Phone 1-800-257-2552
Fax 1-913-492-0188

U.K.
Sokkia Ltd
Electra Way
Crewe Business Park
Crewe, Cheshire, CW1 1ZT
United Kingdom
Phone 01270-250525
Fax 01270-250533

Canada
1050 Stacey Court
Mississauga, Ontario
L4W 2X8 Canada
Phone 1-905-238-5810
Fax 1-905-238-9383
Central & South America
Sokkia Central & South America
1200 NW 78 Avenue, Suite 109
Miami, FL, USA 33126
Phone 1-305-599-4701
Fax 1-305-599-4703
Africa
265 Von Willich Ave.
Centurion, 0157
Republic of South Africa
Phone 27 12 6637999
Fax 27 12 6637998

Spectrum Survey

Asia
Sokkia Singapore Pte. Ltd.
401 Commonwealth Drive
#06-01 Haw Par Technocentre
Singapore 149598
Phone 65-479-3966
Fax 65-479-4966
New Zealand
Sokkia New Zealand
20 Constellation Drive
Mairangi Bay, Auckland 10
C.P.O. Box 4464
Auckland, New Zealand
Phone 64-9-479-3064
Fax 64-9-79-3066

1-5

Chapter 1

1.7

Welcome

Documentation Conventions
The following conventions, typefaces and icons are used in this manual:
Main Menu ...... Indicates menu bar options and functions
| ......................... This symbol is used to separate menu bar options from
menu item selections. For example: File | Save
Dialog Box........ Indicates a small box, opened during interaction with the
software, that contains command buttons and options you
can select to perform tasks. Dialogs are always shown in title
case, bold, italic font. For example, Save As dialog box
Fields................. Indicates options or boxes within a dialog box. Fields are
always shown in bold font. For example, Name field
Tabs.................... Indicates pages in a multi-page dialog box. Tabs are always
shown in bold, italic font. For example, General
List..................... Indicates a field, on a dialog box, that expands to offer
several options. Lists are always shown in bold font. For
example, Antenna Model list
Button ............... Indicates a command button on a dialog box. Buttons are
always shown in angled brackets and bold font. For
example, <Close>
Prompt .............. Represents screen prompts and other information displayed
on the screen. Prompts are shown in bold, 8pt, helvetica font.
For example, Continue prompt
<Key> ............... Indicates a keyboard key that causes an immediate action.
Keys are always shown in angled brackets and bold font. For
example, <1>, <F1>, <ESC>, <Y>
Print................... Represents reports or output to a printer. Print is shown in
8pt, courier font. For example, Report 1

1-6

Note: A note box contains text that explains previous text.

Spectrum Survey

Welcome

Chapter 1
This symbol indicates that adjoining information is displayed on the
computer screen.

This symbol indicates that adjoining text is either a printed report or text
from a disk file.

This symbol indicates important information or warning information

concerning adjoining text.

1.8

Terms
In this manual, the following terms are used:
Base ................... Refers to a stationary GPS receiver that is setup on a known
point and generates reference observations for differential
processing
Remote.............. Refers to a stationary GPS receiver set up over an unknown
point or desired solution point which, when combined with
a base, forms a vector

1.9

On-Line Help
You can get on-line information for many of the operations you perform by
clicking the available <Help> button, or by choosing from the Help main
menu option.

Spectrum Survey

1-7

Chapter 1

Welcome

1.10 Additional Resources

This manual is supported by the Spectrum Survey Workflows and Tips
document, and the Spectrum Survey Suite Advanced Reference Materials
document, which are available on the Sokkia Complete Product CD. To read
these documents, you must have Adobe Reader installed on your PC
(available free at http://www.adobe.com).
The Spectrum Survey Workflows and Tips document (Part Number 750-E-0003)
provides easy-to-follow steps to process and analyze data, as well as tips for
fieldwork methods. The Spectrum Surey Suite Advanced Reference Materials
document (Part Number 750-E-0002), contains information on coordinate
systems, map projections/datums/ellipsoids, and a glossary of surveying
terms.

1-8

Spectrum Survey

Chapter 2

Quick Start
This chapter will get you started using Spectrum Survey. Refer to the general
work flow illustration for a quick reference and to the remaining chapter
sections for startup instructions and a step-by-step quick start (see Section
2.2, Quick Start, Page 2-2).

2.1

General Work Flow

The following illustration shows the general work flow for using Spectrum
Survey. Refer to the following sections for details.

START

Inspect process and vector

summary for fixed solutions and
RMS values

Run Spectrum Survey

Tools | Run Adjustment | Full

Adjustment
Runs the minimally constrained
(free) adjustment

Create a new project

Enter a project name, etc.

Edit Coordinates/Time, Adjustment

and Blunder Detection Settings

Download and import files or Import

data files from disk

Edit | Point
Edit points, antenna, set reference
point and coordinates

Tools | Process Data

process data automatically

Spectrum Survey

Inspect adjustment report for Chi

Square Test on the Variance
Factor

Inspect adjustment report for

Standardized Residuals to
determine outliers

Fix additional control points and

run a fully constrained adjustment.
Repeat analysis

Tools | Export | Trajectories,

Points or Vectors
Select data to export and create an
SDR file

If necessary, run ProLINK and

import file for additional formatting
options

END

2-1

Chapter 2

2.2

Quick Start

Quick Start
Spectrum Survey is a powerful yet flexible program that enables you to view,
manipulate, process, and analyze your data in any number of scenarios. It
also enables you to perform network adjustments after processing.
The key steps for creating a new project are explained below, along with the
toolbar button that opens the dialog box for that step:
1.

If the Project Settings dialog box is not already open, select File | New
to start a new project.

2.

Enter a Project Name, Location, and Date. All other settings can be set
now or configured later at any time.

3.

Click <OK>.

4.

To download data for import into your project, click on the Download
icon.

5.

Use the Download/Upload dialog box to save the data files to a location
on your PC.

6.

Immediately after you close the Download/Upload dialog box, the Data
File Manager dialog box will appear. Click <Import> on this dialog box
to import the data files, stored on your PC, into your new project.

7.

On the Observations tab, highlight any files that contain rover data
(kinematic data), and, if not already selected, click the File Contains
Rover Data check box.

8.

Click <OK>.

9.

From the main menu bar, choose Select | Point or Select | Rover to
open the Point List or Rover List dialog boxes, respectively.

10. Make sure that the Antenna Model and Measured Height fields are
defined correctly for each point and rover.

2-2

Spectrum Survey

Quick Start

Chapter 2
11. (Optional) If you want to manually select a GPS reference site, click (in
the dialog box opened by selecting Edit | Point) the
Use as a reference coordinate check box for the point you wish to fix as
the reference point. If you do not select a reference point, the software
will prompt you to enable it to automatically select the reference point
before it continues with processing.
12. To process all the data using Spectrum Surveys default settings, select
Tools | Process Data, then jump to step #17; otherwise, go through the
following steps.
13. At this point, the plan view typically displays points and vectors. If you
collected kinematic GPS data, you may also see rovers and trajectories.
Edit the vectors and/or trajectories, if desired, by selecting the
appropriate option (Edit | Vector or Edit | Trajectory).
14. By default, Spectrum Survey automatically defines combinations on data
import. If you cleared the Auto generate combinations on import check
box before importing your data, you can choose to define your
combinations now by selecting Tools | Define Combinations. Based
only on the selected points and/or rovers, Spectrum Survey finds point
occupations that overlap in time, and creates vectors; it also finds base
point occupations and rovers that overlap in time, and creates
trajectories.
15. By default, all data is selected for processing. However, if you only wish
to process a subset of the data, choose Select | Point, Select | Vector,
and/or Select | Trajectory; then from the resulting dialogs, select which
ones you wish to process.
16. Select Tools | Process Data to begin post-processing.
17. Examine the processing results using the tools listed under the Analysis
menu category.
18. (Optional) Select Analysis | Loop Closure to open the Loop View. Loop
view calculations help to detect possible errors in vectors computed by
vector processing. This ensures that only reliable vectors are used for
network adjustment.

Spectrum Survey

2-3

Chapter 2

Quick Start
19. (Optional) Select Edit | Point to manually fix at least one point both
horizontally and vertically (or one point horizontally and another
vertically) and check the Plan View to ensure that selected vectors are
connected to one another. If you choose not to manually fix the points,
the software will prompt you to enable it to automatically fix points
before it will continue with the adjustment.
20. (Optional) Select Tools | Run Adjustment | Check only to detect
network configuration errors and blunders in the data.
21. Select Tools | Run Adjustment | Full Adjustment to begin a network
adjustment.
22. Examine the result using the tools listed under the
Analysis | Adjustment menu category.
23. Export vector and/or trajectory results, if desired, through the choices
listed under the Tools | Export menu.
24. Select File | Save or File | Save As to save a Spectrum Survey project.
This manual will guide you step by step through all of these activities.

2-4

Spectrum Survey

Chapter 3

Basic Operations
This chapter provides instructions for performing basic tasks in Spectrum
Survey. As well, the chapter provides information on the softwares desktop,
the Plan View, tools, printing, customizing the software, and
communications.

3.1

Learn the Desktop

The desktop is Spectrum Surveys main work area, and where all dialog
boxes and windows appear. Here, tools are provided to help you work with
your project data. The desktop consists of the following, which displays:
Main Menu bar ................Menu titles that represent categories of program
options. (See Page 3-1)
Shortcut menus ................List of menu options applicable to your current
task. (See Page 3-3)
Toolbar............................... Icons that represent frequently-used commands.
(See Page 3-4)
Status bar .......................... Mode you are in (Process or Adjust), the longitude
and latitude of the cursor in relation to the
network, and your current coordinate system. (See
Page 3-4)

3.1.1

Menu bar
The menu layout varies depending on whether a project is loaded, and if so,
upon which view window is selected (active).

Spectrum Survey

3-1

Chapter 3

Basic Operations
The tables below show the menu bar and the menu structure when a project
is loaded, and the Plan View is active (see Section 3.2, Plan View, Page 3-6).
File

Edit

Select

View

File
New Project

Analysis

Tools

Edit
Point

Window

Help

Select
Point

View
Plan Views >

Open Project

Rover

Rover

Normal

Close Project

Vector

Vector

Select

Save Project

Trajectory

Trajectory

Zoom In

Save As

Session Time

All

Zoom Out

Data File Manager

Project Settings

Last Processed

Zoom Box

Send/Receive

Process Parameters

Mode >

Center

Print

Adjustment Parameters

Fit All

Print Setup

Coordinate System

Show Points

(History: 5 last projects)

Geoid Model

Show Rovers

Exit

Control Points Catalog

Show Vectors
Show Trajectories
Scale Bar
Status Bar
Toolbar

Analysis

Tools

Window

Help

Raw Observations >

Process Data

Cascade

Point List

Define Combinations

Tile Horizontal

Contents
Search for Help on

Processed Vectors >

Run Adjustment >

Tile Vertical

Using Help

Processed Trajectories >

Project Editor

Arrange Icons

About Spectrum Survey

Process Summary

Export >

Close All

Error Options

Options

Minimize All

Adjustment >

Convert Files to RINEX

1 Plan View

Loop Closure

3-2

Note: If the Adjustment Plan View is active, the Point and Rover
options, listed under the Select and View menus, will not appear.

Spectrum Survey

Basic Operations

3.1.2

Chapter 3

Shortcut menus
In addition to the main menu, there are also shortcut menus. A shortcut
menu appears when you click the right mouse button while pointing at an
object on the screen. Shortcut menus contain the most commonly used
actions associated with the selected object.
The shortcut menus differ, depending on whether the processing or
adjustment view is currently active.

3.1.2.1

Note: In the case of selecting points, rovers, vectors or trajectories in

either the Processing Plan View or the Adjustment Plan View, if they are
already selected in the Plan View when you right-click them, the
shortcut menu will display the option De-select. However, if they are not
selected when you right-click them, the shortcut menu will display the
option Select.

Processing shortcut menus

The following table shows the associated shortcut menus on the Processing
Plan View (right-click with your mouse to view). The menus change after
processing is complete (See Section 10.2, Raw Observations, Page 10-4).
Not over an object

Over a Point

Over a rover

Over a vector

Over a trajectory

Normal

Edit Point

Edit Rover

Edit Vector

Edit Trajectory

Select

Select Point

Select Rover

Select Vector

Select Trajectory

Zoom In

Remove Point

Vector Analysis

Trajectory Analysis

Remove Vector

Remove Trajectory

Zoom Out
Zoom Box
Center
Fit All
Select All
Select Last Processed
Adjustment View

Spectrum Survey

Note: If you remove a point, its vectors, trajectories, and other

associated objects are removed also.

3-3

Chapter 3
3.1.2.2

Basic Operations
Adjustment shortcut menus
The following table shows the associated shortcut menus on the Adjustment
Plan View (right-click with your mouse to view):
Not over an object

Over a Point

Over a rover

Over a vector

Over a trajectory

Normal

Edit Point

Edit Rover

Select

Fix Horizontal

Remove Rover

Zoom In

Fix Vertical

Vector Analysis

Trajectory Analysis

Zoom Out

Remove Point

Exclude

Exclude

Remove Vector

Remove Trajectory

Zoom Box

Edit Vector

Edit Trajectory

Select Vector

Select Trajectory

Center
Fit All
Select All
Select Last Adjusted
Processing View

3.1.3

Toolbar
You can choose to display a toolbar under the main menu. Each button
represents a shortcut to a selection from the main menu, and can be hidden
or made visible by selecting View | Toolbar.
The toolbar can be modified by selecting Tools | Options and clicking the
Toolbar tab. Select the desired buttons from the Available Commands
window and click <Insert> to move them into the Toolbar Contents
window. When you return to the Plan View, all buttons in the Toolbar
Contents window will appear on the toolbar.

3.1.4

Note: If a project is not open, some buttons on the toolbar may appear
dimmed.

Status bar
You can choose to display a status bar at the bottom of the main window by
selecting View | Status Bar from the main menu.

3-4

Spectrum Survey

Basic Operations

Chapter 3
When no project is loaded, or no view active, the status bar appears empty. If
a project is loaded, the fields within the status bar will vary depending on
which view is active.
The status bar displays menu and toolbar hints when the pointer is over a
field in the menu or toolbar, temporarily hiding all other fields in the status
bar.
If the Plan View is active (see Section 3.2, Plan View, Page 3-6), the status bar
(if visible) contains the following fields:
Mode ..................................Mode the window is in either Processing Mode or
Adjustment Mode
Coordinate Field.............. Contents of this field depends on the location of
the pointer and current coordinate system selected.
The coordinate is displayed in UTM (on the
current datum) when the coordinate system is
geographic; otherwise, it is displayed in the grid
coordinates for the current system
The Currently................... Double-click on The Currently Selected
Coordinate System Name Field to select a new
coordinate system from a list of all defined
coordinate systems for Spectrum Survey
An example of a status bar is shown here:
Processing Mode

Spectrum Survey

XY(UTM): 1201933.197

12842608.435

GEO

3-5

Chapter 3

3.2

Basic Operations

Plan View
When you start a new project, but you do not import data files, a blank
Processing Plan View appears. Spectrum Survey also supports an
Adjustment Plan View (for more information, see Section 3.2.1, Learn the plan
view, Page 3-7). For the purpose of explaining the main functions of either
view, this section will refer to both as Plan View.

When data is imported into a project, Spectrum Surveys Plan View presents
your data in a visual format. This graphic representation is a powerful tool
that enables you to visually verify and refine your data.
The Plan View interacts with the point, rover, vector, and trajectory editors,
so you can quickly change information and graphically see how the changes
affect your data.
You can perform all of Spectrum Surveys calculations, major processing, and
adjustment functions with the Plan View open:

Editing your collected data

Processing your data

Calculating loop closures

Calculating network adjustments

You can re-size the Plan View window in the same manner as any Windows
application, but note that re-sizing the Plan View window does not modify
the zoom factor. Zooming in or out can be done from the View menu or by
using the Plan Views shortcut menu (for more information on Zoom, see
Section 3.2.3, View controls, Page 3-9).

3-6

Spectrum Survey

Basic Operations

Chapter 3
The Plan View window does not automatically close, and it will stay open
even if you open other windows in Spectrum Survey. If a Plan View and
other Spectrum Survey windows are simultaneously open, selecting a view
from View | Plan Views brings that Plan View to the top of the windows. If
the Plan View is minimized, selecting a view from View | Plan Views
restores that Plan View to its previous size.

3.2.1

Learn the plan view

The Plan View opens on the Spectrum Survey desktop and comes in two
modes: Processing and Adjustment. The mode the plan view is currently in
can be seen in the far left of the desktops status bar.
The Plan View screen consists of three parts from top to bottom.
Title bar ............................. Displays the Plan View title
Project area ....................... Displays the graphical representation of the
current data. Each items status is indicated by a
unique color or combination of color and symbol
within the Plan View. For more information about
the Plan View color and symbol codes see Section
3.2.1.1, Interpret color and symbol codes, Page 3-7
Scale bar ............................ You can set the scale bar to appear either above or
below the Plan View window (the location is
selected in Tools | Options | Plan View). The
Options dialog box enables you to also change the
scale bar font and color. The scale bar can be
hidden or visible by selecting View | Scale Bar
from the main menu

3.2.1.1

Interpret color and symbol codes

The status of each point in the Plan View is indicated by a colored symbol.
As you change the status of the points within your project, the color and
symbol associated with that status will change to reflect the new status. You
choose what the different symbols indicate in the Plan View tab of the
Options dialog box.

Spectrum Survey

3-7

Chapter 3

Basic Operations
The status of vectors is indicated by the color of the vector line. The following
table explains what each color indicates:
Vector color
Red

Yellow

Green

Purple

View
Processing

Unprocessed object

Adjustment

Unadjusted object

Processing

Processed, desired solution not achieved

Adjustment

Adjusted, failed residual test

Processing

Processed ok

Adjustment

Adjusted ok

Processing

Computing, indicates line is currently being processed

or used in loop closure computation

Adjustment

Computing, indicates line is currently being adjusted

Processing

Used to indicate if a vector is currently selected for

processing

Adjustment

Used to indicate if a vector is currently selected for

adjustment

Highlighting

3.2.2

Indicates

Display graphics
Spectrum Survey has four display options in the Processing Plan View
(Show Points, Show Rovers, Show Vectors, and Show Trajectories), and
two display options in the Adjustment Plan View (Show Vectors and Show
Trajectory Data).

Note: The Adjustment Plan View never displays rover data but it always
displays point data. The reason Show Points is not included in the View
menu when you are in the Adjustment Plan View is because point data is
always shown in this view.

When the Plan View is opened initially, all options are visible
simultaneously. However, limiting the number of visible options can quickly
simplify the graphic representation of a complicated or dense project,
making it easier to locate specific points or vectors.
You can determine which options show at any time using the View menu.
Simply select one or any combination of the display options to control what
is displayed in the Plan View.

3-8

Spectrum Survey

Basic Operations

3.2.3

Chapter 3

View controls
When the Plan View is first opened, the entire network is displayed centered
in the project area. Zooming in on a network can simplify locating specific
points or vectors in an especially complicated or dense network. Decreasing
the scale factor enables you to view a larger area of the network.
From the View category on the menu you can control whether the toolbar,
status bar, and/or scale bar are hidden or visible. For example, you can
toggle the scale bar on or off by selecting View | Scale Bar.
As well, you can change the magnification level and orientation of the Plan
View by selecting one of the following from the View menu:
Plan Views ........................ Enables you to view either the Processing View
(data that is available for processing or already
processed) or Adjustment View (data that is
available for adjustment or already adjusted)
Normal............................... Return your pointer to a standard arrow.
Select..................................Changes your cursor to a pointing finger and
enables you to select data for processing or
adjustment. The select option is described further
in Section 8.6, Select Raw Data for Processing, Page
8-23.
Zoom In ............................. Click on a point to zoom in on the plan view; the
maximum zoom factor is 10000. The cursor
changes to the shape shown.
Zoom Out.......................... Click on a point to zoom out of the plan view; the
minimum zoom factor is 0.001. The cursor changes
to the shape shown.
Zoom Box .......................... Left-click and drag the mouse to zoom in on that
part of the plan view. The cursor changes to the
shape shown. The following steps show how to
magnify the Plan View in using the zoom box.
1.

Spectrum Survey

Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse cursor across the
screen. A zoom box will be drawn on the screen.

3-9

Chapter 3

Basic Operations
2.

Continue to hold the left mouse button and drag the cursor across the
screen until the zoom box surrounds the section of your project that you
want to magnify.

3.

When you have selected the section you want to magnify, release the left
mouse button and the Plan View will zoom in.

4.

(optional) Repeat steps 1-3 to perform consecutive zooms to increase the

magnification of the project.

5.

Use Zoom Out to view the data in a larger scale. The Plan View will be
centered where you place your cursor before zooming out.

6.

Select Normal from the View menu to return to your original mouse
pointer.

Center ................................ Click on a point to center it in the plan view. The

cursor changes to the shape shown.
Fit All .................................Re-size the plan view to fit all data within it.
Show Points...................... Select whether the point positions should be
shown on the Processing Plan View, or hidden. If
points are hidden, vectors are automatically
hidden also.
Show Rover ...................... Select whether the rovers positions should be
shown on the Processing Plan View, or hidden. If
rovers are hidden, trajectories are automatically
hidden also.
Show Vectors.................... Select whether the vectors should be shown or
hidden on the Processing Plan View or the
Adjustment Plan View.
Show ..................................Select whether the trajectories should be
Trajectories
shown on the Processing Plan View or hidden.
Show ..................................Select whether the trajectory data (subset of
Trajectory Data
the vector information that was processed) should
be shown on the Adjustment Plan View, or hidden.

3-10

Spectrum Survey

Basic Operations

3.2.4

Chapter 3

Select and edit data

The Plan View enables you to select individual points and vectors with the
mouse (See Section 8.2, Edit the Plan View, Page 8-2 for menu and editing
details).
You can also select individual points, rovers, vectors or trajectories, using the
Select menu (See Section 8.6, Select Raw Data for Processing, Page 8-23, and
Section 9.3.7, Select objects, Page 9-31).
You can edit point, rover, vector, and trajectory data from within the Plan
View by accessing their respective Editor dialogs in the Edit menu.

3.3

Dialog Boxes
Whenever you enter or configure options in Spectrum Survey, you do so in a
dialog box. Although each dialog box is different, most have the following
three buttons that behave similarly:
<OK> .................................Usually enables you to exit a dialog box and apply
the changes you just made
<Cancel> ........................... Enables you to exit a dialog box without making
any changes to the current configuration. This
button also appears when you are able to halt an
action currently happening in the software
<Help>............................... Opens a help file with information pertaining to
the dialog box currently open

3.4

Customize Spectrum Survey

Before you begin using Spectrum Survey, you should define its parameters to
suit your needs. These features and parameters affect the program on a
global basis. Any changes to the settings in these tabs are saved for following
working sessions and override the factory-defined settings.
Spectrum Survey enables you to define:

Spectrum Survey

Options

Process Parameters

3-11

Chapter 3

3.4.1

Basic Operations

Options
These settings are configured under the six tabs that are visible when you
select Tools | Options from the menu:
General .............................. Select whether to create backups, toggle an alarm
for the creation of manual points, or toggle an
alarm when there are missing or corrupted
ephemeris files. As well, determine whether you
see the Welcome dialog box when Spectrum
Survey first opens. See Section 3.4.1.1, General,
Page 3-12
Plan View.......................... Customize the graphic display. See Section 3.4.1.2,
Plan view, Page 3-13
Time ................................... Control which time units and time zone are to be
used. See Section 3.4.1.3, Time, Page 3-15
Antenna Models .............. Define custom antenna models. See Section 3.4.1.4,
Antenna models, Page 3-15
Toolbar............................... Customize the toolbar contents. See Section 3.4.1.5,
Toolbar, Page 3-18
Combinations................... Choose whether vectors and/or trajectories will be
generated, and how they are defined. See Section
3.4.1.6, Combinations, Page 3-19

3.4.1.1

General
General options can be accessed by selecting Tools | Options from the
menu, and then clicking on the General tab.

3-12

Spectrum Survey

Basic Operations

Chapter 3
The General tab options, listed below, enable you to change file settings for
the project, and toggle an alarm for the creation of manual points:
Create Backup .................Automatically create a backup of your current
project. Your project has a *.spr file extension, and
the backup has a *.bak file extension
Status Bar .........................Show the status bar
Toolbar .............................. Show the toolbar
Prompt creating ............... (Prompt when creating or renaming points
manually) To be asked to confirm your decision
before creating a new point (See Section 8.4.1, Point
editor, Page 8-6)
Prompt ............................... (Prompt when there are missing or
ephemeris
corrupted ephemeris files) If you want to be
informed of this when you are processing data (See
Section 5.6, Import Data, Page 5-14)
Show welcome .................To show the Welcome dialog box when Spectrum
Survey first opens

3.4.1.2

Plan view
Plan View options can be accessed by selecting Tools | Options from the
menu, and then clicking on the Plan View tab.

The Plan View refers to Spectrum Surveys main window, which displays
your data. Use this tab to customize the graphic display:
Display Toggles ............... To specify which objects to display graphically in
the Plan View
Spectrum Survey

3-13

Chapter 3

Basic Operations
<Color...>........................... Found in the Background section, this button is
used to bring up a Color Editor dialog box that
enables you to modify the background color of the
plan view
Horizontal .........................Specifies the location of the scale bar with respect
to the main window (None, Top, and Bottom)
<Color...>........................... Found in the Scale Bars section, this button is used
to bring up a Color Editor dialog box which
controls the color of the scale bar
<Font...>............................. Used to bring up a Font Editor dialog box. If the
editor is modified, the scale bar lettering changes
to the selected font
Type.................................... Enables you to change the plan view graphic
associated with the symbol type (Point, Rover,
Reference Point, and Control Points) by clicking
on one of the available representations in the
selection array
Height ................................ Specifies the size of the symbols displayed in the
projects plan view
Valid range of values for this field is 1 - 9999;
you can also select one of the values in the list
(10, 15, 20, or 30)
This group has two options (Pixels and Working Units) which specify the
unit of measure for the value in the Symbol Settings group. Only one of
these two options may be active at once. If you select Pixels, the symbols
remain the same size no matter what the plot scale. If you select Working
Units, the symbols resize with the scale of the plot.
Point Labels...................... Has two options (Names and Codes) which
indicate which string will be used to label points in
the Plan View; the name for each point, or the
point description for each point (as seen in the
Point Editor dialog box). The default option is
Names

3-14

Spectrum Survey

Basic Operations
3.4.1.3

Chapter 3

Time
Time options can be accessed by selecting Tools | Options from the menu,
and then clicking on the Time tab.

The Time tab enables you to control which time units and time zone are to be
used by providing the following options:
Time Format .................... Choose between GPS, UTC, and Local time by
selecting an option from this list. A preview is
shown in the field below it
Time Zone ........................ Only available if the Time Format is set to Local. In
this section choose a standard time zone (click
<Standard>, then choose a pre-defined time zone),
or click <User> and define your offset (-12 to +12,
in hours) in the Offset from Greenwich field. If
you select a standard time zone, select Use
Daylight Savings Time if you want the time to be
automatically adjusted every spring and fall
3.4.1.4

Antenna models
The Antenna Models options can be accessed by selecting Tools | Options
from the menu, and then clicking on the Antenna Models tab.

Spectrum Survey

3-15

Chapter 3

Basic Operations
The Antenna Models tab is split into four columns:

Name................................Unique name to identify the antenna

NGS Antenna ID...........Predefined NGS Antenna ID from the list. By
specifying an NGS Antenna ID for an antenna, its
phase center characteristics will automatically be
applied during processing. If no IDs are assigned,
select the default model "None"
Radius..............................Value between 0.000 and 9.999, representing the
distance from the center of the antennas vertical
axis to the antenna height measurement point
Offset ...............................Value between 0.000 and 99.999, representing the
vertical offset from the antenna height measurement
point, and the antennas phase centre (mechanical).
Check your antenna label or documentation to
determine its offset
By default, the Antenna Models list always contains an antenna model, its
parameters being:
Name
<None>

3-16

NGS ID
<None>

Radius
0.000

Offset
0.000

Spectrum Survey

Basic Operations

Chapter 3
Create or add
To create or add a new antenna model, click on <New>. A new record is
added to the window with the default name ModelX, where X is the next
possible number to make the name unique in the window.
The other columns contain the same defaults as that of the <None> model
described earlier. The antenna models are sorted according to their names. If
the list becomes longer than would be visible in the window, a scroll bar
appears.
Delete
Click <Delete> to delete the highlighted antenna model from the window.
Sort
To sort the rows, click on a field label for sorting to be done according to that
field. For example, click the field label Offset to sort the rows from smallest
to greatest antenna offset.
Edit
To edit what is displayed in a specific field, click the field. The Name,
Radius, and Offset fields are directly editable when you click on them.
Double click on an NGS ID field to bring up a list from which you can select
currently-defined antenna NGS IDs.

Select antenna
If you are unsure which NGS ID to select in the list, you can preview all the
possible antenna selections by clicking on <NGS ID> located on the bottom
right of the Antenna Models tab.

Spectrum Survey

3-17

Chapter 3

Basic Operations
The Antenna NGS ID dialog box appears.

To select an NGS ID, choose a name from the Antenna NGS ID list. The
values in the Make, Model, and Description fields are automatically
updated when you make a selection. When you are finished browsing the
available NGS IDs, click <Done> to return to the Antenna Models tab. Click
<OK> to save your changes, or <Cancel> to disregard your changes.
3.4.1.5

Toolbar
Toolbar options can be accessed by selecting Tools | Options from the menu,
then clicking on the Toolbar tab.

Customize the toolbar contents by selecting any of the required operations

on the left side of the screen in the Available Commands list, then clicking
on <Insert>. The command is inserted into the list of Toolbar Contents, and
can be re-positioned by clicking on <Up> or <Down>.
To delete a button from the toolbar, select it in the Toolbar Contents list, and
click <Remove>. Similarly, you can also insert or delete spacers between the
buttons on the toolbar. See Section 3.1.3, Toolbar, Page 3-4 for a list of all
available toolbar buttons.

3-18

Spectrum Survey

Basic Operations
3.4.1.6

Chapter 3

Combinations
Combination options can be accessed by selecting Tools | Options from the
menu, and then clicking on the Combinations tab.

The Combinations tab enables you to define the default values for automatic
network generation. From the Combinations tab you can specify whether
vectors and/or trajectories will be automatically generated, and how they
will be defined.
The Combinations window has an Auto generate combinations on import
check box which, when selected, enables you to set the software to
automatically generate combinations as data files are imported. If you choose
this option, any future data files imported into your project, and any new
projects, will have their combinations automatically generated according to
the settings currently selected on this page. The following settings are
available on this window:
Define Vectors.................. Select this check box if you want vectors to be
generated during automatic processing
Minimum Overlap .......... In the Vector section, this field specifies the
minimum time overlap required between point
occupations, for the point occupation pair to define
a vector
Valid range of values is 1 - 60 (minutes or
seconds), or select an option from the list (5, 10,
15, 20, 30, 45, or 60)

Spectrum Survey

3-19

Chapter 3

Basic Operations
Minutes ............................. In the Vector section, click this button if you want
the required time overlap to be expressed in
minutes
Seconds.............................. In the Vector section, click this button if you want
the required time overlap to be expressed in
seconds
Define Trajectories .......... Select this check box if you want trajectories to be
generated during automatic processing
Minimum Overlap .......... In the Trajectory section, this field specifies the
minimum time overlap (absolute or relative)
required between a base point occupation and a
rover file in order for a differential trajectory to be
generated. Single point trajectories which require
no base point occupation are not generated
automatically and must be specified using <New>
in the Edit | Trajectory dialog box. The available
list items and default values for this field depend
on whether you clicked on the Minutes or
Percentage (%) option
Minutes ............................. In the Trajectory section, click this button if you
want the required time overlap to be expressed in
minutes
Valid range of values is 1 - 60, or select an option
from the Minimum Overlap list (5, 10, 15, 20,
30, 45, or 60)
Percentage (%) .................In the Trajectory section, click this button if you
want the required time overlap to be expressed as
the percentage of rover file time that must be in
common with a base point
Valid range of values is 1 - 100, or select an
option from the Minimum Overlap list (50, 60,
70, 80, 90, or 100)

3-20

Spectrum Survey

Basic Operations

3.5

Chapter 3

Manage Reports
Each time you initiate a calculation or action in Spectrum Survey, data
reports are produced that contains the calculation results. These reports can
be analyzed to guide additional data refinement, loop closures, and
adjustment iterations, or to determine if the data is ready for export.
Spectrum Survey generates several different report file types:
Report Type

File Extension

Import error logs

*.inp

Loop closure results

*.txt

Point list

*.txt

Process summary

*.txt

Vector summary

*.txt

Trajectory summary

*.txt

Residuals reports

*.rsd

Full adjustment reports

*.prt

Error log

*.log

You can choose to save each of these report types to your PC. The default
report location is the Results directory located within the Spectrum Projects
directory. For example, if you saved the SiteA projects full adjustment report
(NetAdj.prt) to your PC, by default it would be stored as follows:
\\Sokkia\Common\Spectrum Projects\SiteA\Results\NetAdj.prt

In addition to viewing and saving reports, Spectrum Survey enables you to

manage report files by renaming, closing , and opening files.
Every time a calculation is performed that generates a report, the report is
displayed in the main project area. Multiple reports can be displayed in the
main project area simultaneously by choosing Window | Tile Vertically or
Window | Tile Horizontally from the main menu bar.

Spectrum Survey

3-21

Chapter 3

3.5.1

Basic Operations

Generate reports
When you initiate a calculation or action in Spectrum Survey, the program
automatically generates a data report that displays the results. If you
generate a new report of the same type, Spectrum Survey will give it the
same default name. When you save the report, you can decide to rename the
report or overwrite the previous report.
All reports generated by Spectrum Survey are in ASCII format and can be
manually edited in a text editor. You can change the way Spectrum Survey
displays adjustment reports by selecting Analysis | Adjustment | Report
Options. For more information on changing Report Settings, see Section 12.4,
Calculate the Network Adjustment, Page 12-14.
In addition to viewing reports, Spectrum Survey enables you to manage
report files in the following ways:

3.5.2

Saving (see Section 3.5.2, Save reports, Page 3-22)

Opening files (see Section 3.5.3, Open report files, Page 3-23)

Editing (see Section 3.5.4, Edit reports, Page 3-23)

Closing (see Section 3.5.5, Close reports, Page 3-24)

Save reports
You can save report files generated by Spectrum Survey (to reference them in
the future) by following these steps:
1.

With the report window active, select File | Save As from the main
menu. The Save As dialog box will display.

2.

If you want to save the file with a name other than the default name,
enter the new file name in the File name field.

3.

3-22

Note: Using the default file name will result in the report being
overwritten the next time a report of the same type is saved using the
default name from the project in question.
Select the appropriate file type from the Save as type field.

Spectrum Survey

Basic Operations

3.5.3

Chapter 3
4.

(optional) Select a new directory for the file from the Folders menu.

5.

Select <Ok>.

Open report files

You can open a current project report file or a previously saved adjustment
report file to view your project results.
From the Analysis menu option, choose any of the available reports to view
details about your project. You can choose to open these reports anytime
while your project is open.
If your project is closed, use a text editor to open any of the saved reports
from your projects Results directory (or the directory you chose to save your
reports).

3.5.4

Edit reports
The reports generated by Spectrum Survey are standard ASCII (text format)
and enable common editing techniques. Although you cannot edit reports
that are open in your project, you can open and edit reports that you saved to
your PC.
When a report is open in a text editor, you can use standard Cut, Copy, and
Paste from the Edit menu to edit the result report You can manually type any
information or comments into the report text. Any modifications you make
to the report by cutting, copying, pasting or typing text must be saved by
selecting File | Save from the main menu.

Spectrum Survey

Note: You can also use the Adjustment Report Options dialog box to
configure the display of adjustment reports. Choose Analysis | Report |
Adjustment Report Options (see Section 12.4, Calculate the Network
Adjustment, Page 12-14 for more information).

3-23

Chapter 3

3.5.5

Basic Operations

Close reports
Simply click the <X> in the upper-right corner of the report window to close
a report that is open in your project. When you close a report, Spectrum
Survey does not automatically save it. You will have to manually save the
report to your PC (see Section 3.5.2, Save reports, Page 3-22).

3.6

Printing
The contents of any Spectrum Survey window may be printed. This includes
all analysis documents and plots, as well as either Plan View. Analysis plots
are scaled to fill the entire available page area upon which they are to be
printed. Analysis documents (summaries etc.) are generated with a format
identical to that seen in their respective windows.
The Plan View representation that is printed is governed by the current
display of the Plan View window. The actual Plan View itself (as seen in its
window) is printed, rather than the current scale/coordinates set-up for the
display. The Plan View is printed using the maximum available page area,
with the limitation that the representation printed remains isometric.
Printing never spans multiple pages; it is always performed in fit-to-page
mode. No real-scale printing is supported.
Printer setup
To setup your printer options, choose File | Print Setup from the main
menu.
Print project
To print your project, select File | Print from the main menu, or use the
shortcut menu (right click) when viewing any of the plots.

3-24

Spectrum Survey

Chapter 4

Communications
This chapter explains how you can communicate with GPS devices, through
Spectrum Survey, to download and upload files to or from your PC.

4.1

Stratus Communication Notes

When communicating with the Stratus receiver, the setup for
communications can differ depending on what operating system is running
on your PC. As well, before you can communicate using the IrDA port, you
must first install and adaptor.

4.1.1

Operating system
Important: For communications with the Stratus receiver, please read the
following information that corresponds to the operating system on your PC.
Windows NT .........................If you are communicating with a Stratus
receiver, and your PC is running Windows NT,
you will require a serial cable to establish
communications.
Windows 9x and ME ............These operating systems enable you to use an
IrDA adapter to communicate with Stratus.
Windows 2000 .......................This operating system enables you to use an
IrDA adapter to communicate with Stratus, but
the COM port to which you plug in the IrDA
adapter will stay dedicated to IR
communications in Windows 2000 until you
re-boot your PC. An alternative to re-booting
your computer is to just use the optional serial
cable for communications instead of the IR
adapter.

Spectrum Survey

4-1

Chapter 4

Communications

4.1.2

Note: Contact your dealer for more information on obtaining a cable.

Refer to your Stratus Operations Manual for in-depth instructions on
downloading Stratus files. Refer to the readme.txt file included with
your Spectrum Survey Suite installation for instructions on installing the
IrDA drivers.

Installing your IrDA adapter

To use the IrDA to download data from Stratus to your PC, you must first
install the IrDA adapter. Instructions for installing IrDA appear
automatically in a readme file when Spectrum Survey is installed on your
machine; however, you can open the readme file at any time by inserting the
Sokkia Complete Product CD into your CD-ROM drive and locating the
readme.txt file in the Spectrum Survey directory.

4.2

Connect to the Device

Spectrum Survey enables you to transfer files from several sources using one
of several listed devices. To select a communication device:
1.

4-2

Select File | Send/Receive from the main menu to open the

Download/Upload dialog box.

Spectrum Survey

Communications

4.3

Chapter 4
2.

Click the desired device in the Device window. If your device is not
listed, choose a device from the Device Type list, located under the
Device window on the right side of the dialog box.

3.

Click <Connect>.

4.

While the software is trying to communicate with the selected device,

you will be presented with a dialog box. You can stop communications at
any time by clicking <Cancel> to terminate connection with the device.

5.

If the device cannot be found, a dialog box will inform you.

6.

Otherwise, the software will connect with the device and the Device
window will update to show the files located on the selected device.

Select a Destination Directory

The Download/Upload dialog box Local Machine lists a directory on your
PC. Choose this or another directory to download your files.

Note: Whichever directory you choose to download your files will be the
directory that is displayed the next time you open the Download/Upload
dialog box.

When you have your destination directory selected, you can proceed with
the file transfer.

4.4

Device Transfer Options

You can decide how fast the data will transfer from the device to the PC.
Keep in mind that some devices have a recommended speed (baud rate) to
transfer data. Refer to your device manual for more information on its data
transfer capabilities.

Spectrum Survey

Note: Device settings should not be changed when you are connected to
a device.

4-3

Chapter 4

Communications
To access device settings, click <Settings> to open the Communications
Device Settings dialog box.

Configure the following settings if they are relevant to your device:

port, baud rate, parity, data bits, stop bit

When your settings are complete, click <OK> to return to the

Download/Upload dialog box.

4.5

Transfer Files
To transfer files, follow these steps:

4-4

1.

Select a device type (see Section 4.2, Connect to the Device, Page 4-2), the
File Types list updates to include only file types associated with that
device.

2.

Choose from the File Types list to filter which files you see in the Local
Machine window, or choose All Files (*.*) to see all the files in the
chosen directory.

3.

Ensure that a destination directory is chosen for your file (see Section 4.3,
Select a Destination Directory, Page 4-3).

4.

Ensure that the device transfer settings are correct (see Section 4.4, Device
Transfer Options, Page 4-3).

Spectrum Survey

Communications

Chapter 4
5.

Click on the files in the Device window or in the Local Machine window
that you want to transfer. To select more than one file, hold the <Ctrl>
key while selecting files. To select a range of files, hold the <Shift> key
while you select the first and last file in the range.

6.

Click on the arrow button to initiate transfer. If you have ever used an
FTP program, you will recognize that this dialog box works in the same
manner.

7.

4.6

Note: Not all devices allow files to be downloaded or uploaded. Refer to

the documentation with your device for more information.
During file transfer, the transfer status is displayed on a progress bar.
When the transfer is finished, the message Complete will appear. Click
<Close> to return to the Plan View.
Note: Files can be imported from your PC to your project by selecting
File | Data File Manager (see Section 5.6, Import Data, Page 5-14).

Disk/Memory Settings
Besides transferring files, you can perform several functions to the devices
data card such as:
Write protect ......... Ensures that you do not lose your current data by
mistakenly clearing (erasing) it. A disk that is write
protected will not allow additional data to be written to it
and will not allow itself to be erased
Write enable.......... A data card previously set to write protect can be reset
using this option if you want it to save files or if you want
to clear (erase) all data from the card
Clear/Format......... Data can be cleared off the Radian IS, Stratus, and
GSR-series receivers. During this operation, the data card
is also formatted to ready it for the next time you use it to
collect data

Spectrum Survey

4-5

Chapter 4

Communications
Defragment........... Sometimes files on disks can become fragmented
(broken-up) into several areas of the data card, making it
longer to access information on the disk. Defragmenting a
disk will put the files back into sequence and make the
disk faster to search

Note: Not all options are available on all devices. Refer to the
documentation with your device for more information.

Simply click <Disk/Memory> in the Download/Upload dialog box to choose

the options from the following list:

4.7

Note: Features in the Disk/Memory dialog box will appear dimmed if

they are not available for your device .

Status
It is possible to view information about the card size, amount of remaining
free space, card battery status and the cards write status.
The following dialog box appears when you click <Status> after connecting
to the Stratus receiver.

The information displayed is for viewing only, and cannot be edited.

4-6

Spectrum Survey

Section 2 - Project Setup

This section includes procedures for starting a project, importing data, and working with
observation files.
At the end of this section, you should know how to create a new project in Spectrum Survey,
import your data into that project, and be ready to begin working with and processing the data.
Section 2 includes:

Create a Project

Import Data

Convert to RINEX

Chapter 5

Create a Project
Spectrum Survey provides a logical and easy-to-use system for creating,
editing, and saving your project files. Refer to the following sections for
information on setting up a project.

5.1

Welcome Dialog Box

When Spectrum Survey is first opened, the Welcome to Spectrum Survey
dialog box may appear.

The Welcome to Spectrum Survey dialog box displays the following options:
New .................................... Click to create a new project. For more
information, see Section 5.2, Create a New Project,
Page 5-2.
Existing.............................. Click to open an existing project. For more
information, see Section 5.4, Open an Existing
Project, Page 5-12.
Re-open ............................. Click to re-open a project. The last project that was
opened in Spectrum Survey (if found) will load
into the Processing Plan View.

Spectrum Survey

5-1

Chapter 5

Create a Project
Without.............................. Click to open the Spectrum Survey main window
without opening a project or the Plan View
window. Spectrum Survey will display an empty
desktop.
Show Welcome.................Clear the Show welcome at startup check box if
you do not want to see the Welcome to Spectrum
Survey dialog box every time the software is
opened. If you disable this dialog box, but later
you decide you want this dialog box to appear,
reset the option in Tools | Options | General.

5.2

Create a New Project

To start a new project from the Welcome dialog box, click on the Create a
New Project icon (see Section 5.1, Welcome Dialog Box, Page 5-1); otherwise,
select File | New from the menu.
An empty Plan View automatically appears, and the Project Settings dialog
box opens to enable you to enter information about the project:

The following tabs are available on the Project Settings dialog box:

5-2

General (See Page 5-3)

Coordinate/Time (See Page 5-5)

Spectrum Survey

Create a Project

Chapter 5

Adjustment (See Page 5-6)

Blunder Detection (See Page 5-7)

Note: If a project is currently open, that has not been modified since its
last save, it is closed before a new project is opened. If changes have
occurred since the last save of the current project, you will be prompted
to save your project.

When you finish entering information in the Project Settings dialog box,
click <OK>. The Project Startup dialog box opens to prompt you to import
data into your project or download data to the PC. Alternatively, you can
choose to open a new project without data.

The options on the Project Startup dialog box are further explained in
Section 5.3, Project Startup, Page 5-10.

5.2.1

General tab
The General tab of the Project Settings dialog box, enables you to set basic
project information.

Spectrum Survey

5-3

Chapter 5

Create a Project
The General tab displays the following fields:
Project Name .................... When you create a new project, you are
automatically presented with the Project Settings
dialog box.
By default name, the name ProjectX will be automatically applied to your
project, unless you specify the project name when the project is first created.
Project names identify the project in report headers and output text files.
When you close the Project Settings dialog box, the Project Name field
cannot be edited unless you select File | Save As.
User Name ........................ Enter your name or the name of the person
performing the survey processing.
Date .................................... When the project is first created, you can enter the
planned process date for this project; otherwise,
allow the software to automatically enter the
project creation date in this field. Once a date is
entered into this field, either by you or by default,
and the Project Settings dialog box is closed, the
Date field is made unavailable for editing.
Location............................. This field displays the location of the software data
directory determined when you installed the
software. You can change this path by clicking the
ellipsis <...> button located to the right of this field.
Note: once the Project Settings dialog box is
closed, the data path is set and can no longer be
edited.
Comments .........................Use this field to enter a message no greater than
255 characters. comments generally help you to
identify the project data.
Company........................... Enter you company name in this field.
Client .................................Enter the name of the client for whom you are
supplying the survey information.

5-4

Spectrum Survey

Create a Project

Chapter 5

5.2.2

Note: If no previous projects were created in Spectrum Survey, the User

Name, Company, and Client fields will appear empty. If a previous
project was created and saved, these fields will by default display the
values entered for the last project.

Note: This is your only chance to edit information in the Project Name,
Date, and Location fields of the General tab. Information entered now
will always be used for this project.

Coordinates/time tab
You can modify coordinate system settings, time units, and time zone using
the Coordinates/Time tab of the Project Settings dialog box.

The Coordinate/Time tab displays three sections: Coordinates, Time Units,

and Time Zone.
The Coordinates section provides the following options to specify the active
coordinate system definition and geoid for the current project:
Coordinate System.......... This list displays all the currently defined
coordinate transformation systems. Next to this list
is an ellipsis <...> button. Click this button to open
the Coordinate System Selection dialog box to
select or create new coordinate system definitions.

Spectrum Survey

5-5

Chapter 5

Create a Project
Geoid Model .................... This field displays the currently selected geoid
model for the project. Next to this field is an
ellipsis <...> button. Click this button to open the
Geoid Model Selection dialog box to select or
import a new geoid model for use with the current
project.

Note: For new projects, this field will contain the default model of the
last project you created. If this is the first time you are using Spectrum
Survey, this field value is <None>.

The Time Units and Time Zone sections provide options to define the format
for the time settings in the current project. The definition of this group box is
analogous to that of the Time tab of the Tools | Options dialog box. For more
information, see Section 3.4.1.3, Time, Page 3-15.
The default coordinate, time, and geoid settings will be the same as those
that were in use for the last project opened in Spectrum Survey.

5.2.3

Adjustment tab
The Adjustment tab enables you to set parameters that control the
adjustment configuration and error reporting. The content and behavior of
the Adjustment tab of the Project Settings dialog box will be exactly the
same as seen for the General tab of the Adjustment Parameters dialog box.
For more information, See Section 12.3.4, Apply adjustment settings, Page 12-6.

5-6

Spectrum Survey

Create a Project

5.2.4

Chapter 5

Blunder detection tab

A blunder is an observational error. Usually, blunders are caused by user
error such as forgetting to enter the antenna height information or entering
an incorrect point name in the field.
The Blunder Detection tab enables you to set project parameters for the
software to perform automatic blunder detection.

The Blunder Detection tab displays two sections: Antennas and Points.
The Antennas section provides the option to display warnings if antenna
heights are outside a certain range, or if points are detected during
processing with the current antenna model selected as <None>.

Spectrum Survey

Note: Although the following explanations use meters, the unit of

measurement that appears on the Blunder Detection tab depends on the
coordinate system you choose for your project. See Section 5.2.2,
Coordinates/time tab, Page 5-5 for more information.

5-7

Chapter 5

Create a Project
The following are available in the Antennas section:
Antenna heights... ........... The antenna height are outside the range fields
specify the validrange for point and rover
measured antenna height values in the current
project.
Valid range of values is 1.000 to 3.000 meters,
but you can enter values in the range of 0 to 100
meters
Check box is selected by default, and the height
value is displayed with 3 decimal places
Enter into the two fields, located to the right of the field, the minimum and
maximum height range for the antenna.
The first fields value must be less than the second fields value.
When new points are added to the project, a check will be performed to
ensure the antenna heights are within the specified range. If the antenna is
not within the range, you will be alerted with a message and the option to
disable the range test.
As well, this check will be applied anytime you modify measured antenna
heights in the current project. If the modified height is not within your
requested range, you will be alerted with a message and the option to
continue anyway or cancel your request. You can also choose to disable the
range test.
Processing items .............. The Processing items with a current Antenna
model of <None> check box indicates whether
points or trajectories will be tested for a valid
antenna model before they are processed. By
default, this check box is selected.
During this test, points or trajectories selected for processing will be checked
to see if an antenna model has been assigned. If not, a warning dialog box
will display and you will be provided with the option to disable the test.
If you decide to disable the test by selecting (checking) this check box, the
test will not performed again for any objects.

5-8

Spectrum Survey

Create a Project

Chapter 5
The Points section provides options for the software to display a warning
about the distances between points.
The following are available in the Points section:
Distance between ............ Value of The distance between an
exceeds
imported point and an existing point with the
same name exceeds field is used for new site
validation during project data import.
Valid range of values is 1 to 9999 meters, with a
default of 200
Check box is by default selected
This test is performed when new point occupations are added to a project
during data file import.
If the name of the new point being imported matches the name for an
existing project point, the distance between the new and existing points is
compared against the tolerance value specified.
If the test fails, a warning dialog box will display the message This
occupation of point <pointname> is more than <value> meters from the existing
point position. Create a new point? If you click <Yes> a new project point and
name will be created automatically for the conflicting point; otherwise, the
position discrepancy between the points is ignored.
This test helps prevent point naming blunders by ensuring that points with
the same name have approximate coordinates that are reasonably close to
one another.
Distance between ............ Value of The distance between an
less
imported point and an existing project point with
a different name is less than field is used to flag
points that have locations that are within a linear
distance of the existing project points.
Valid range of values is 1 to 9999 meters, with a
default of 50
Check box is by default selected

Spectrum Survey

5-9

Chapter 5

Create a Project
This test is used to check if project points with different names may actually
be occupations of the same point. This test helps to ensure that points are
named correctly and consistently. If the test fails, a warning box will be
displayed with the text The coordinates specified for Point <pointname> are
within <value> meters of Point <pointname>, and you will have the option to
combine these separate points into a single point with multiple occupations.
Distance moved ............... Value of The distance a point is moved exceeds
field is used to alert you that the change in the
points coordinate has moved the point more than
the tolerance you set from its previous position.
Valid range of values is 1 to 9999 meters, with a
default of 200
Check box is selected by default
This test is used to check that changes you make to a coordinate that is
associated with a point does not exceed the tolerance you set in the field
located to the right of this check box.
If the test fails (a coordinate is set to a position outside of the set tolerance) a
warning box will be displayed with the text Possible blunder: The position of
this site has been moved by more than <Value> <units>. \n\nIs this correct?" You
will have the option to continue with the change or cancel and give the
coordinate another position.

5.3

Project Startup
The Project Startup dialog box opens automatically after you click <OK> on
the Project Settings dialog box. See Section 5.2, Create a New Project, Page 5-2.

5-10

Spectrum Survey

Create a Project

Chapter 5
The Project Startup dialog box provides the following options:
Download .........................Click this button to download data files, stored on
your receiver, to your PC. When this option is
selected, the Download/Upload dialog box will
open. For more information, see Chapter 4,
Communications.

When you close the Download/Upload dialog box, the Data File Manager
dialog box will appear enabling you to import the files into your project. For
more information see Section 5.6, Import Data, Page 5-14.

Spectrum Survey

5-11

Chapter 5

Create a Project
Import from disk ............. Click this button to import data files, already
stored on your PC, into your new project. The
Import Observations and Ephemeris dialog box
will open. For more information, see Section 5.6,
Import Data, Page 5-14.

Do not import................... Click this button to open the new project without
importing data files. The Project Startup dialog
box will close, and an empty Plan View will open.
You can decide at any time during your project to
import data files. See Section 6.2, Import New
Observations & Ephemeris, Page 6-4 for more
information.

5.4

Open an Existing Project

To open an existing project from the Welcome dialog box, click on the Open
an Existing Project icon (see Section 5.1, Welcome Dialog Box, Page 5-1);
otherwise, select File | Open Project from the menu. The Open dialog box
appears:

5-12

Spectrum Survey

Create a Project

Chapter 5
By default, this dialog box displays the file type Project (*.spr), but you can
change the List Files of Type list to All Files (*.*).
When you attempt to open a file, the following happens:
Not Valid ........................... If it is determined not to be a Spectrum Survey
project file, then it will not open and an error
message will display.
Missing Tables .................If it is a valid project file, all of its associated tables
are checked. If any tables are missing, a message
displays and the project is not opened.
Valid Project ..................... If it is a valid and complete project file, it will open.
A Plan View is created to display the project data
(For example, rovers, trajectories, vectors, and
points). For information on determining which
data to display, see Section 3.4.1.2, Plan view, Page
3-13.

5.5

Edit the Project Settings

Spectrum Survey enables you to edit the settings for your project using the
Project Settings dialog box evoked by selecting Edit | Project Settings from
the menu bar.

Spectrum Survey

5-13

Chapter 5

Create a Project
At any time during the editing of your project, you can enter the Project
Settings dialog box and choose any of the following tabbed pages to edit
your project settings:

General (See Page 5-3) * see note below

Coordinate/Time (See Page 5-5)

Adjustment (See Page 5-6)

Blunder Detection (See Page 5-7)

5.6

Note: Once a project is created, the Project Name, Date, and Location
fields on the General tab of the Project Settings dialog box are no longer
available for edit. Those fields must be edited when the project is first
created.

Import Data
Before you can compute vectors, trajectories, and point positions in your
Spectrum Survey project, you must import the observation data files and any
associated satellite broadcast ephemeris files that you collected with a GPS
receiver.
For more information, see Chapter 6, Import Data Into a Project.

5.7

Save a Project
Attempting to close a project that has not yet been saved requires
confirmation. Click <Yes> to save and close the current project, <No> to
discard changes to the current project, or <Cancel> to keep the current
project open.
To save a project with its existing name, select File | Save.
To save a project with a new name (*.spr), select File | Save As. Use the Save
As dialog box choose a location for your project on either your local
computer or a network by selecting the location from the Save In list. All

5-14

Spectrum Survey

Create a Project

Chapter 5
Spectrum Survey-generated external files are copied to the selected location.
The non-Spectrum Survey-generated external files (in other words,
ephemeris and observations) are not copied.
The default location for saving projects is:
C:\\Sokkia\Common\Spectrum Projects

A folder with the same name as your current project is created in the
directory where you save your project file (*.spr). Within this folder, three
more folders are created: Data, Database, and Results. Use the Data
directory to store the data files you use in your project, the Database
directory is automatically used by the software to store files specific to the
project, and the Results directory is the default location for storing all reports
and logs generated by the software when you process or adjust your data.
For example, if your project is stored as follows:
C:\Sokkia\Common\Spectrum Projects\projectX.spr

The following directories will be created:

C:\Sokkia\Common\Spectrum Projects\projectX
C:\Sokkia\Common\Spectrum Projects\projectX\Data
C:\Sokkia\Common\Spectrum Projects\projectX\Database
C:\Sokkia\Common\Spectrum Projects\projectX\Results

5.8

Edit an Existing Project

Existing projects can be modified using the Project Editor dialog box which
appears when you select Tools | Project Editor.

Spectrum Survey

5-15

Chapter 5

Create a Project

Caution: Editing existing projects is recommended for advanced users

only.

The Individual section of the Project Editor dialog box lists all of the
projects data items showing their Type, Name, Time, and whether or not
they have been Processed. From this section, you can highlight a number of
items for deletion. Remember to select the Delete Selected Items check box
to ensure deletion.
Each project contains working files that store point, rover, vector, and
trajectory information specific to that project, and maintains links to raw
observation and satellite ephemeris files. From the Entire Project section you
can delete an entire project, its results, and/or its residuals.
Three options are available and should be selected if applicable:
Delete Current .................Removes every record within the projects
Project
database tables. Any external files that were
created by the program such as residuals, rover
epochs, and trajectory epochs are deleted. Any
project folders that are empty after these files are
removed will be deleted.
Delete Results .................Deletes all vectors and trajectories within the entire
project. Any external files created by the program
and associated with results (such as vector
residuals, trajectory residuals and trajectory epoch
files) are also deleted.
Delete Residuals ............. Deletes all residual files (generated during
processing) attached to vector and trajectory
results within the entire project.
Click on <OK>. A message will appear confirming that the project will be
saved.
To close the Project Editor dialog box without deleting any data, click on
<Cancel> in the Project Editor dialog box.

5-16

Spectrum Survey

Chapter 6

Import Data Into a Project

Before you can compute vectors, trajectories, and point positions in your
Spectrum Survey project, you must import the observation data files and any
associated satellite broadcast ephemeris files that you collected with a GPS
receiver.
You can import files into Spectrum Survey directly from your PCs hard
drive or from a removable disk (For Example, a CompactFlash card or a
CD-ROM). First, download data files to your PC or removable disk directly
from the GPS receiver or a data collector (See Chapter 4, Communications).
Once your files are downloaded, import them from your hard drive or disk
into Spectrum Survey. To import data files into your project, select File |
Data File Manager from the main menu to open the Data File Manager
dialog box.

The Data File Manager tabs are used to view, import, and remove
observation and ephemeris files in the current project. The tabs handle
management of:
Observations .................... Observation files
Ephemeris .........................Ephemeris file data (satellite orbit data)

Spectrum Survey

6-1

Chapter 6

Import Data Into a Project

The top of the Data file Manager dialog box contains the following buttons:
<Download> .................... Download files directly from the receiver to your
PC. Transfer instructions are found in Chapter 4,
Communications
<Import> ........................... Import files that are located on your PC, into your
project (See Section 6.2, Import New Observations &
Ephemeris, Page 6-4)
<Delete>............................ Remove the currently selected observation or
ephemeris files from the project. On removal of an
observation file, all vector occupations, trajectories,
and point occupations containing links to this
observation file are also removed from the project.
If there were any processed results, they are lost as
well
The bottom of the Data File Manager dialog box contains the following:
File contains ..................... Change the status of the selected observation
rover data
files kinematic flag, which changes the file from
a static to a rover file. Remove the checkmark to
change the file back to static
<OK> .................................Save all changes
<Cancel> ........................... Discard all changes to file rover status, and restore
any files removed from the project
............................... Click the <Notes> button to view notes associated
with the selected Stratus observation file. This
button will appear dimmed if no notes are
associated with the observation file selected, or if
more than one observation file is selected

6-2

Spectrum Survey

Import Data Into a Project

6.1

Chapter 6

Notes
Clicking the <Notes> button opens the Notes dialog box.

The main window of the Notes dialog box displays read-only information
about the selected observation file and its associated notes. Notes are
information that you entered into the data collector during the selected
observation time. Several notes can be attached to one observation file. Use
the navigation buttons at the top of the Notes dialog box to move forward
and backward through the notes.
By default, the information shown first in this window when the
Notes dialog box opens is the Import Log file.
The Import Log contains the following information that shows:
Import log for file............ Location and name of the observation file to which
the import log belongs
File imported at................What time the observation file was imported into
the project
Data detected.................... If almanac, ephemeris, or observation data was
detected within the file
Associated.........................If the Stratus file has an associated controller
controller
file. Controller files only exist if a controller was
used with the Stratus receiver in the field. Also
displays the number of point occupations and note
records associated with the observation file

Spectrum Survey

6-3

Chapter 6

Import Data Into a Project

Notes are displayed in order of time they were created, starting with the
earliest. The Time field at the top of the Notes dialog box appears empty
until a note is loaded into the main window and the time the note was
created is displayed in the field.
If a note is associated with a point record, the top of the note will display the
name of the point to which it belongs. If any occupations for that point were
discarded during import because Spectrum Survey detected incomplete time
spans, a message will appear at the end of that points note informing you
that the occupation was not imported.
Click <Close> to exit the Notes dialog box.

6.2

Import New Observations & Ephemeris

Open the Import Observations and Ephemeris dialog box, which is used to
import new observation and ephemeris files into the current project, by
clicking <Import> in the Data File Manager dialog box (See Section 6, Import
Data Into a Project, Page 6-1).
You can view you data in several ways in the Import Observations and
Ephemeris dialog box (you will recognize these ways if you are used to
working in a Windows environment). The most common views are the
Details and List views. In each view, a File Properties window enables you
to preview the data in the file before importing it.

6-4

Spectrum Survey

Import Data Into a Project

Chapter 6

Select the File Preview check box to display file names and the selected files
properties in the File Properties window.
When you select multiple files, only the first file selected will have file header
information displayed, such as start/end times and point data.

Note: If the file previewed is an Axis3 file (*.axs), only the file start and
end times will be shown. Point information is not provided.

For certain data file types (For Example, RINEX V2), the property display
may take several seconds to display the information. By deselecting the File
Preview check box, you can disable the properties display to speed up your
work.
Files with Zero .................When this box is selected, any file with zero
Points are STATIC
points is assumed to be static for its entire
duration. Upon import, a default point is
automatically created for these files. This checkbox
is always deselected by default.
If this check box is not selected, files without points
are imported as kinematic data files.

Note: Spectrum Survey always automatically detects rovers when

importing files. Any file that has only one point is imported as a static
file. Any file with two or more points is imported as a kinematic data file.

When files are imported, any associated meteorological and/or antenna

information stored in the file is saved and serves as the default measure for
any points or rovers associated with this observation file.

Spectrum Survey

6-5

Chapter 6

6.2.1

Import Data Into a Project

Import file types

The Files of Type list shows all available file formats that can be imported.
The available filters are as follows:
Extension

File Type

Description

*.pdc

Sokkia/POINT,
Inc./NovAtel

raw format (observations and ephemeris)

*.str

Sokkia/POINT, Inc.

Stratus/Smart Series observations and ephemeris

*.axs

Sokkia

Axis/Axis3 GPS data file

*.gsr

Sokkia

raw proprietary format GPS data

*.gss

Sokkia

raw proprietary format GPS data

*.stx or *.kix

Sokkia/POINT, Inc.

Stratus/Smart Controller file (static or kinematic)

b*.*

Ashtech

observation data

u*.*

Ashtech

observation and ephemeris data

e*.*

Ashtech

ephemeris data

*.sp3

n/a

GPS precise ephemeris data

*.??O

RINEX V2

observations

*.??N

RINEX V2

GPS ephemeris

*.dat

Trimble

observation and ephemeris data

*.*

n/a

Other

The ?? in these file names corresponds to the last two digits of the year.

6.2.1.1

Importing RINEX files

A RINEX observation file header contains the position (coordinate)
information for a point. Upon import of the RINEX file, Spectrum Survey
creates a corresponding point in your project. The position of the point

6-6

Spectrum Survey

Import Data Into a Project

Chapter 6

created in your project will have the same coordinates as the point in the
RINEX file header, providing the position is within the following set
tolerance:
The point coordinate imported from the RINEX header (also known as the imported
position), is compared to a Spectrum Survey generated single point position for the
site (also known as a computed position). If the difference between the computed and
imported positions exceeds 200 meters, the imported position is rejected, and the
computed position is used as the approximate project position for the point.
If the imported position is used, the Source field, located on the Point Editor
dialog box (Section 8.4.1, Point editor, Page 8-6), will indicate RINEX data file.

6.2.1.2

Note: If the point occupation from the imported RINEX file is added to
an existing project point, the RINEX header position information will be
ignored.

Importing Stratus files

You can choose to import a Stratus receiver file (*.str) or a Stratus controller
file (*.stx or *.kix) into your current project.
Receiver File ..................... Since it is assumed that a Stratus receiver, if used in
the field, will be used with only one controller, a
receiver file is associated with only one controller
file.
Controller File.................. Because the one controller could be used with
several base station receivers in the field to collect
data, a controller file may reference more than one
Stratus receiver file.

Spectrum Survey

Note: Static jobs logged to the Stratus controller in the field are *.sta data
files. When these files are downloaded to your PC, Spectrum Survey
converts the file to a *.stx data file. Kinematic jobs are logged to the
Stratus controller in *.kin data files. When these files are downloaded to
your PC, Spectrum Survey converts the file to a *.kix data file.

6-7

Chapter 6

Import Data Into a Project

Import receiver file
When you use a Stratus controller device with your Stratus receiver, a
receiver file and a controller data file are created. When you import the
receiver file into your project, Spectrum Survey will automatically import the
associated controller file, providing they are located in the same directory.
If you moved your receiver file from the directory where you originally
downloaded it from the Stratus controller, and did not move the controller
file along with it, you will be warned when you try importing the receiver
file into Spectrum Survey that the controller file is not in the current import
directory (directory where the receiver file is stored).
You can decide to import the receiver file even though the controller file
cannot be found, and if you make that choice, Spectrum Survey will ignore
the missing controller file, and a point will/will not be created for the file
based on the current state of the Zero Points are STATIC check box on the
Import Observations and Ephemeris dialog box.

Note: If you decide to import the receiver file without the corresponding
controller file, all point and note information related to the receiver file
(contained in the controller file) will not be available. In order to access
that information, you will have to import the controller file.

If you decide not to import the receiver file without the controller file, then
Spectrum Survey will ignore the import of that file and move on to the next
file selected for import.

6-8

Note: The imported controller file will not be seen in the Data File
Manager dialog box once the import operation has been completed.
Mention of the imported controller file will be seen only in the Import
Log associated with the imported Stratus data file. See Section 6.1, Notes,
Page 6-3 for an explanation on the Import Log.

Spectrum Survey

Import Data Into a Project

Chapter 6

Import controller file

When a Stratus controller project file is selected for import, all associated
Stratus receiver data files (that are referenced in the selected project file) will
be imported to Spectrum Survey, providing the files are all located in the
same directory.
If one or more of the receiver files referenced in the controller file cannot be
found in the current import directory, you will be warned with a message
dialog box. As well, if any of the receiver files referenced in the selected
controller file are already part of the current project, they will be ignored and
you will not be notified.

Note: A controller data file cannot be imported and associated with a

receiver file that is already part of the current project. If you choose to
continue the import process, field notes and point information can only
be recovered by removing this receiver file from the project, and
re-importing either the controller or the receiver file again.

Once the import procedure for the controller file completes, a message dialog
box will display how many receiver data files were successfully added to
your current project.

Spectrum Survey

Note: The number of files counted as 'successful' for the current import
will not include those files that were already part of your current project
at the time of import.

6-9

Chapter 6

6.2.2

Import Data Into a Project

Import messages
The following messages may appear when you are importing your data.
Case 1:
While each point is being imported it is verified to ensure that you did not
give different points the same name. If two points have the same name, but
different positions, a message is displayed.

Two points may have the same name if you are importing data collected by
different field personnel who used an inconsistent naming convention; or the
naming error could be a blunder. Most likely you did not intend for the two
points in different positions to have the same name, so you should select
<Yes> to create a new project point for the imported data. If you choose
<No>, a new point occupation will be added to the existing point.
Case 2:
While each point is being imported it is verified to ensure that you did not
give the same point two different names. If it is suspected that the same point
has been given two different names, a message is displayed.

Choose <Yes> to add the suspected point as a new point occupation to the
existing point or <No> to identify that the suspected point is actually a
separate and unique point from the existing point.

6-10

Spectrum Survey

Import Data Into a Project

Chapter 6

Case 3:
If during the import process, point records are detected which contain
invalid antenna information (in other words, invalid heights or unsupported
models) these invalid properties will be set to default values. A prompt will
appear to advise you of this.
Case 4:
If your PC is running the Windows 2000 operating system, a Warning dialog
box will appear if you attempt to import one or more files from a removable
media source (For Example, CompactFlash card or CD-ROM) or from a
network drive.
If you try to import from a removable media source or network drive, the
Warning dialog box will tell you that one or more of the files you have
selected for import are located on a removable disk, or on the network drive,
respectively. The message will then tell you that if you choose to continue to
import the file(s), they will not be available to your project if the disk is
removed or the network drive is lost. You have the option to continue with or
cancel the import.
Select <No> to cancel the import, or select <Yes> to open a second dialog box
asking if you want to copy the files to your projects Data directory. The
message will state:
"It is recommended that the file(s) from your <drivename> drive be copied to the
current project's data folder and then imported from this location. Would you like to
copy the file(s) from the <drivename> drive to your project's data folder?".
Select <No>, and the import of the selected files will continue from their
current location. Select <Yes> and the files will be copied to your projects
Data folder and subsequently imported from that location.

Spectrum Survey

6-11

Chapter 6

6.2.3

Import Data Into a Project

File import considerations

When importing files, keep the following in mind:

Point names are automatically created for observation files with no

information

If an observation file is imported with no point information, and the flags are
set to consider this as a static point, a point name will be created for the entire
file with the filename used as the point name.

Point positions are automatically computed

Point positions on import are computed using an averaged single-point

solution.

Files are analyzed for validity and uniqueness

Files are analyzed for validity (they must be of a type recognized by

Spectrum Survey) and uniqueness (they cannot be identical to a file already
in the project). If the file format detected does not correspond to its filename
extension, a prompt dialog box will ask you to confirm the import. If the file
format cannot be recognized, an error dialog box is invoked.

New points are automatically selected for processing

New points (or point occupations) are automatically selected for processing
and are displayed in the plan view the next time that it is redrawn. If a point
coordinate cannot be generated, the point is assigned the coordinates (0, 0, 0)
and a message is displayed that warns you about possible problems
displaying this new point in the plan view.

Combinations are automatically generated

By default, vector and trajectory combinations are automatically generated

when your data is imported into your project. This setting can be changed in
the Define Combinations dialog box (see Section 9.2.1, Define combinations,
Page 9-2).

6-12

Spectrum Survey

Import Data Into a Project

6.3

Chapter 6

Observations Tab
In the Data File Manager dialog box (See Section 6.2, Import New Observations
& Ephemeris, Page 6-4), click the Observations tab.

The Observations tab is used to view, import, and remove observation files
that are part of the current project. Use this tab to change the status of an
observation file records kinematic flag, which changes the file from a
static to a rover file, or vice versa.

Note: To add files to this page, see Section 6.2, Import New Observations &
Ephemeris, Page 6-4.

The tabs main display window contains a list of all observation files in the
current project. Information for each observation file is contained on a single
line in the list, and is organized according to six headings that run across the
top of the window:
File ..................................... Name of the observation file
Obs File ID ...................... Observation files identification within the
Spectrum Survey interface
Start ................................... Time of the earliest time tag found in the
observation file
End .................................... Time of the latest time tag found in the observation
file

Spectrum Survey

6-13

Chapter 6

Import Data Into a Project

Points ................................ Number of point occupations that are dependent
upon the file for observation data. If there are no
point attachments defined for an observation file,
this field is 00. The number is displayed as a 2-digit
integer, with a range of 00 - 99
Rover .................................You can change the Rover status for any record by
double-clicking on that record in the Observations
main display window
The Rover status (Yes or No) determines which files are available as rovers
within the current project and are available for the creation of new
trajectories. If a file has a Yes status, that indicates the file contains kinematic
data. If a file has a No status, that indicates the file contains only static data.
When you double-click a record to change its Rover status to Yes, the File
Contains Rover Data check box is automatically selected. As well, if you
simply highlight a file in the main window, then select the check box, the
Rover status will change to Yes or No to reflect your choice.

Notes:
The File Contains Rover Data check box appears dimmed if the
currently selected observation file in the list window is associated with
trajectories that already have processing results. If a file records Rover
status is Yes, changing that status to No will remove all trajectory records
that are associated with that file.
All point occupations defined by the selected file remain unchanged
when the file changes from a rover (Yes) to a static (No) observation file.
Subsequently, the file is unavailable in any instance in which the rover
file status is a requirement (For example, trajectory processing)

Using the <Ctrl> or <Shift> key, and clicking with the mouse, or pressing
<Select All>, you can select multiple or individual files in the main display
window of the Data File Manager dialog box. To remove the selected files
from the dialog box, click <Delete>. To change the rover status of the
selected items to Yes or No, click in the File Contains Rover Data check box.

6-14

Spectrum Survey

Import Data Into a Project

Chapter 6

Notes can only be accessed for one file at a time. To view the notes associated
with a file, click the <Notes> button. If more than one record is selected, the
notes button will appear dimmed.
Files with extension *.pdc contain ephemeris and observations data. If you
remove a *.pdc file from the Observations tab it is also removed from the
Ephemeris tab. The reverse is not true; if you remove a *.pdc file from the
Ephemeris tab it still remains in the Observations tab.
The window headings are displayed in fields whose width you can vary, so
that all the data can be properly viewed.

6.4

Ephemeris Tab
In the Data File Manager dialog box (See Section 6, Import Data Into a Project,
Page 6-1), click the Ephemeris tab.

The Ephemeris tab is used to view, import, and remove ephemeris files that
are part of the current project. The main display window contains a list of all
ephemeris files in the current project.
Information for each ephemeris file is contained on a single line in the list,
and is organized according to four headings that run across the top of the
window:
File ......................... Name of the ephemeris file. This name includes the drive
and directory for the file, within the limits of the available
field width
Spectrum Survey

6-15

Chapter 6

Import Data Into a Project

Type ....................... Format of the ephemeris data contained in the file. The
data format is displayed in its abbreviated form, where
BC = Broadcast
Start ....................... Earliest time found in the ephemeris file
End ........................ Latest time found in the ephemeris file
Items in the Ephemeris window are individually selected or deselected. This
feature is used to select a file record to be removed from the project. You may
select a record by single-clicking it, at which time it appears highlighted;
click it again to deselect it. Only one record in the window may be selected at
once.
Files with a *.pdc extension contain ephemeris and observations data. If you
remove a *.pdc file from the Ephemeris tab, it still remains in the
Observations tab. The reverse is not true; if you remove a *.pdc file from the
Observations tab it is also removed from the Ephemeris tab. These headings
are displayed in fields whose width you can vary, so that all the data can be
properly viewed.

6-16

Spectrum Survey

Chapter 7

Convert to RINEX
The Convert Files to RINEX option is used to convert GPS observations to
RINEX V2, which are at times used by other software applications.
To convert data to RINEX V2 format, select Tools | Convert Files to RINEX.
The Conversion to RINEX V2 dialog box is displayed.

Note: Spectrum Survey supports direct importation of Sokkia (*.pdc,

*.gsr, *.gss), Trimble (*.dat) and Ashtech (b*.*, u*.*, e*.*) file types as well
as raw observation file types from other products. Therefore it is not
necessary to convert any of these file types to RINEX V2 for use within
Spectrum Survey.

The Conversion to RINEX V2 dialog box, displays the following:

<...>..................................... Click this ellipsis button to open a file browser for
locating and selecting desired observation and/or
ephemeris files.

Spectrum Survey

7-1

Chapter 7

Convert to RINEX
Up to three output files, as listed in the following table, are created when you
click on <OK>:
File Extension

File Type

Description

*.??o

RINEX V2

Observation file containing all the raw measurement

information

*.??n

RINEX V2

Ephemeris file containing the broadcast ephemeris

extracted from the satellite navigation message

*.??m

RINEX V2

Meteorological file created if there is meteorological

data in the input data file

The ?? in these file names corresponds to the last two digits of the year.

Export Only ...................... Select to export data, that is aligned to

Aligned Epochs
epochs, to the RINEX format.
<OK> .................................Click to open a header dialog box to input optional
information in the RINEX V2 file header. The
header data is written to the beginning of each of
the output files.
The type of header dialog box that appears depends on whether the data you
are converting currently exists in your open Spectrum Survey project.

7.1

Data Not in Project

If the data that you are converting is not currently in your project, the Project
File RINEX Header dialog box will appear. See Section 7.4, Standard RINEX
Header, Page 7-5.

7.2

Data in Project
If the raw data you are converting to RINEX currently exists in your open
project, a message box will inform you that:
"One or more files selected for conversion are part of the current project. Would you
like to include project point and antenna information in the converted RINEX file?".

7-2

Spectrum Survey

Convert to RINEX

Chapter 7
Choose one of the following message box options:
<Yes>..................................Choose this option and the Project File RINEX
Header dialog box will open. For instructions on
working with this dialog box, see Section 7.3,
Project File RINEX Header, Page 7-3.
<No> ..................................Choose this option and the Standard RINEX
Header dialog box will open. For instructions on
working with this dialog box, see Section 7.4,
Standard RINEX Header, Page 7-5.

7.3

Project File RINEX Header

When you convert raw data from your current project to RINEX, you have
the option to include information about the project in the header of the new
RINEX file. If you select <Yes>, the Project File RINEX Header dialog box
will appear.

The caption on the Project File RINEX Header dialog box includes the name
of the observation data file that is being converted. The following fields are
available on this dialog box:
Agency creating ............... (Agency Creating RINEX File) By default contains
the Company name you set in the Project Settings
dialog box.
Spectrum Survey

7-3

Chapter 7

Convert to RINEX
Antenna Marker .............. Displays a message stating that point information
from the current project will be used.
S/N...................................... Enter the serial number of the antenna used when
collecting the data.
NGS ID.............................. If the selected data file is marked as a Rover
(kinematic file) in the current project, the NGS ID
field will contain the name of the NGS antenna
type associated with the rover. If the selected data
file contains one point occupation, the file is
considered static and the NGS ID field will contain
the name of the NGS antenna type associated with
the site occupation.
Observer and .................... Displays the information in the User Name
Organization
and Company fields in the Project Settings dialog
box.
Comments .........................Enter misc. information about your file.
<OK> .................................When you have finished entering all your
information, click to close the dialog box and
convert the selected observation data file to RINEX
V2 format
During conversion, all points in your current Spectrum Survey project that
are associated with the selected observation file will be output to the
generated RINEX file. This includes all relevant antenna information for each
point occupation. As well, the header information you just edited is written
to the RINEX file.
If you do not want to continue with the conversion to RINEX, click <Cancel>
to close the current dialog box and return to the Conversion to RINEX V2
dialog box.

7-4

Spectrum Survey

Convert to RINEX

7.4

Chapter 7

Standard RINEX Header

The Standard RINEX Header dialog box will appear when you convert to
RINEX raw data not in your current project. This dialog box will also appear
when you choose <No> to include project information in the new file header.

Agency............................... By default, the first time you access this dialog box,
the Agency Creating RINEX File field will read
Spectrum Survey. Edit this field to say what you
desire. The next time you access this dialog box,
the name last supplied to this field will appear as
the default
Antenna Marker .............. Displays the name and number associated with the
point
S/N...................................... Enter the serial number of the antenna used when
collecting the data
NGS ID.............................. Enter the name of the antenna type
Height Delta ..................... Refers to the antenna height, from the surveyed
point at ground level, with respect to the antenna
phase center

Spectrum Survey

7-5

Chapter 7

Convert to RINEX
East Delta and .................. Refers to the antennas offset from a marker
North Delta
during a static observation, with respect to the
antenna phase center
Observer and .................... By default, the first time you access this
Organization
dialog box, these fields are blank. The next time
you access this dialog box, the names last supplied
for these fields will appear as the default
As the conversion is performed, a progress bar is displayed to show the
progress. When the conversion is complete, a confirmation message appears.
Click on <OK> to return to the Plan View window.

7-6

Spectrum Survey

Section 3 - Edit and Process Data

This section provides information about editing and processing data within your project.
At the end of this section, you will know how to manipulate the data that you imported into your
project to prepare it for processing. As well, this section provides the steps to process the data.
Section 3 includes:

Edit Data

Process Data

Chapter 8

Edit Data
Spectrum Survey enables you to edit the data collected during your survey.
This option is especially important since it enables you to verify field data
entries and correct any blunders or inconsistencies found. As well, any
missing information such as antenna heights or antenna models may be
added at this time.
For troubleshooting purposes during processing, if you find an error in the
data (for example, incorrect occupation times or unhealthy satellites), you
can use Spectrum Survey to edit the current settings and reprocess your data.

8.1

Edit Coordinate System

You can modify your coordinate system prior to importing your data, when
you set-up your project, or after your data has been imported. If, when you
import your data in Spectrum Survey, you decide that you want to see your
data in a different coordinate system, you can use the Coordinate System
Selection dialog box to make that change.
To edit the coordinate system for the current project, select Edit | Coordinate
System and choose the desired selection. The Coordinate System Selection
dialog box opens.

Spectrum Survey

8-1

Chapter 8

Edit Data
For a detailed description of the steps involved in choosing a coordinate
system, please consult the How To Define Map Projections, Ellipsoids &
Datums section of the Spectrum Survey Suite Advanced Reference Materials.

8.2

Edit the Plan View

Once you import data to the current project, the information (points, vectors,
trajectories) is displayed graphically in a Plan View window (See Section
3.2.1, Learn the plan view, Page 3-7). The following shows the display of a
typical static data collection session:

8.3

Control Points
Spectrum Survey features a Control Points Catalog that enables you to enter
known coordinates for frequently used survey points and assign these
coordinates to points in your project. What makes the Control Points
Catalog handy is that it saves all the control point information you enter into
it for use with every project afterwards.

8-2

Spectrum Survey

Edit Data

Chapter 8
To open the Control Points Catalog, click Edit | Control Points Catalog
from the main menu.

On the left side of the Control Points Catalog dialog box are fields where
you enter the information to define your control points. The window on the
right side of the dialog box lists of all the control points you define.

8.3.1

Add a point
To add a point to the window, modify the fields on the left side of the dialog
box to display the information of your control point. The fields included are:
Name..................................Enter a name to uniquely identify your control
point. For rules on naming files in Spectrum
Survey, see Table 1, Naming Convention, Page 8-8
Coordinates ...................... Use the Latitude, Longitude, and Ell. Height fields
to enter 3D coordinates associated with the point
When you finish creating your point, click <Add> to store the point in the
catalog. A message will alert you if the point you are trying to add has the
same name as a point already in the catalog. In this case, you can decide not
to add the point, or you can add the point by overwriting the previous point.
Check the listing on the right of the dialog box to make sure the point you
just added is listed.

Spectrum Survey

8-3

Chapter 8

8.3.2

Edit Data

Add multiple points

If you have a list of points that you want added to the Control Points
Catalog dialog box, but you do not want to have to type in each point
separately, you can edit the usrctlpts.txt file located in the
Point\Common\System directory.
The usrctlpts.txt file is created automatically the first time you enter a point
in the Control Points Catalog dialog box. If you have not created this file,
but you have a list you would like to show up automatically in the catalog,
simply open a new document in a text editor, copy your point information to
that document, and save it to the System directory as usrctlpts.txt.

Note: Saving a file you create called usrctlpts.txt to the System directory
will overwrite the current usrctlpts.txt file if one already exists in the
System directory. If you overwrite a file, the information previously
stored within it will be lost.

It is important that the point information you enter into the usrctlpts.txt file
is formatted correctly so that the catalog can read and properly display the
information. All coordinate information you enter must be referenced to the
WGS84 datum. Latitude and longitude must be written in degrees, and the
ellipsoid height must be written in meters.
The following is the format for entering point information:
<Name of the point>, <Lat>, <Long>, <Ell. Height>,

This is an example of how the text inside the file should appear:
SB SK, 3 6.107 10739 , 140 .11187 379, 82.45 4,
NK TB, 3 7.129 61296 , 140 .11755 093, 70.85 1,
po int 1 , 38. 90908 054, -94.85 13354 1, 28 4.849 ,
00 18307 0, 38 .9090 8054, -94.8 51335 41, 2 84.84 9,

When the Control Points Catalog dialog box is opened, all points stored in
the usrctlpts.txt file will appear in the window on the right side of the dialog
box.

8-4

Spectrum Survey

Edit Data

8.3.3

Chapter 8

Edit a point
To edit a control point, click on it in the window on the right side of the
dialog box. The fields on the left side of the dialog box will update to show
the information of the point you just selected. Simply edit the information in
the fields, and when you finish making the changes, click on <Add>. A
message stating This point is already in the list. Do you want to change the point
information? will appear. Click <Yes>.

8.3.4

Delete a point
You can delete single or multiple points from the catalog by clicking on them
in the window to select them, then clicking <Delete>. The point or points are
immediately removed from the catalog.

8.3.5

Change the coordinate system

Points are displayed in the window of the Control Points Catalog dialog box
using the current coordinate system selected for your open project. If you do
not have a project open, the point coordinates will be displayed using the
current default coordinate system selected for Spectrum Survey.
You can change the coordinate system from within the Control Points Catalog
dialog box by choosing a new system from the selection in the Coordinate
System list.
If the system you want is not in the list, click the Coordinate system
icon, located to the right of the Coordinate System list, and choose
from all the available coordinate systems.

Spectrum Survey

Note: Changing the coordinate system within the Control Points

Catalog dialog box also updates the coordinate system within your
currently open Spectrum Survey project.

8-5

Chapter 8

8.4

Edit Data

Edit Raw Data

You can edit a point, point occupation, or a rover in three ways:

Double-click on its symbol in the plan view

Move the pointer over the symbol in the plan view, and right click;
choose the Edit option from the shortcut menu

Select Edit | Point or Edit | Rover from the main menu

Any of these actions will invoke the corresponding Editor dialog box,
described in the following sections.

8.4.1

Point editor
The two tabs of the Point Editor dialog box are used to edit the parameters
and occupations of a specific point in the current project.

As well, options are available in the Point Editor dialog box outside of the
tabs that enable you to select other points for editing. When you complete
your editing, click <OK> to keep any changes made, or click <Cancel> to
discard all changes.

8-6

Spectrum Survey

Edit Data
8.4.1.1

Chapter 8
About points
A Point Name list is available at the top of the Point Editor dialog box. This
list contains the names of all points containing occupations within your
project. Selecting a point from this list enables that point to be edited, and
only one point name can be selected at once. If a point name is selected from
this list, the fields in both tabs of the Point Editor dialog box update
automatically to reflect the properties associated with the selected point.
Edit a point position
If a point position is edited (see Section 8.4.1.2, Point information tab, Page
8-10), the new coordinates are checked to ensure they are not more than +/200 meters (656 feet) from the old position. If the they are, you will be
prompted to confirm that you wish to move the point to the new coordinates.
Click on <Yes> to move the position, or <No> to cancel the move.
Remove a point
Points are removed by:

Right-clicking over them in the Plan View window and choosing

Remove Point from the shortcut menu.

Selecting Tools | Project Editor from the main menu.

Removing an observation file from the project. All point occupations

associated with a deleted file are also removed from the project.

Moving incorrectly associated point occupations to the correct point to

which they belong. If all the point-occupations for a given point record
are moved, the point record is removed from the project database.

Rename a point
You can rename a point but only if the new name provided is not already
used by another point. Click <Rename>, located at the top of the Point
Editor dialog box, to open the Rename Point dialog box.

Spectrum Survey

8-7

Chapter 8

Edit Data
In the Target Point field, enter a new name for the point. Ensure that the new
name meets the conventions in Table 1:
Table 1: Naming Convention
Convention
does not contain the characters -, /, (,), <, >
must be 1 to 16 characters long
must have at least one valid non-blank character
must be unique within the current project

Note: Point names are saved and displayed with the case in which they
are entered, but testing the uniqueness of a point name is not case
sensitive. It is possible to rename a point with its own name but in a
different case (For example, renaming Pointa to PointA).

New points
To add a new point occupation to the project, click <New> in the Point
Editor dialog box to open the New Point Occupation dialog box.

Several fields are available in this dialog box:

Point Name ....................... Used to select the point to which the new point
occupation is to be added
The Point Name list contains the names of all points in the current project.
Only one point name may be selected at once, and if you enter a new point
name in this field, it must conform to the naming convention described in
Rename a point, Page 8-7.
8-8

Spectrum Survey

Edit Data

Chapter 8
Occupation Start.............. Used to define the start time of the new point
occupation
The start time specified for the occupation must be within the time span of
the observation file associated with the point occupation and must be before
the end time specified for the occupation. The occupation start time specified
cannot overlap with the time span for any other point occupation defined by
the same observation file. If the point occupation start time specified
overlaps with another occupation time span for the same point (zero vector
condition), a prompt dialog box is invoked.
Occupation End ............... Used to define the end time of the new point
occupation
The end time for the new occupation must be after the start time specified for
the occupation and must be within the time span of the observation file
associated with the new point occupation. The occupation end time specified
cannot overlap with the time span for any other point occupation defined by
the same observation file. If the point occupation end time specified overlaps
with another occupation time span for the same point (zero vector
condition), a prompt dialog box is invoked.
Obs File ID ....................... Used to select the observation file associated with
the new point occupation
The list contains the Observation File IDs for all observation files within the
current session time for the project. Only one file ID may be selected at once.
File Start ............................ Used to display the earliest possible start time for
the new point occupation
These static fields always display the first time tag from the currently
selected observation file.
File End ............................. Used to display the latest possible end time for the
new point occupation
These static fields always display the last time tag from the currently selected
observation file.

Spectrum Survey

8-9

Chapter 8

Edit Data

8.4.1.2

Note: When a new point occupation is created, default meteorological

measures are used, but the antenna model and measured antenna height
for the new point occupation are taken from the observation file
associated with the new occupation.

Point information tab

The Point Information tab is used to define characteristics that are specific to
the selected point. This information affects all occupations of the selected
point.

The Point Description field enables you to add an alternative label to the
point name.
GPS section
The GPS section has two check boxes:
Use as a Reference........... To specify whether or not the point and its
Coordinate
current coordinates should be held as a fixed
reference during GPS processing

8-10

Spectrum Survey

Edit Data

Chapter 8
When this check box is enabled, the point coordinate displayed will not be
updated (will be held fixed) for any GPS processing operation; however, this
coordinate information may be updated during adjustment if the point is not
used as the horizontal or vertical control. See Adjustment section, Page 8-11 for
more information.

Note: if the point was automatically selected as a reference by Spectrum

Survey itself, then the point coordinate may be updated during
subsequent processing operations.

Compute single................To indicate an averaged single-point position

point Position
for the point should be computed
If the check box is active, the next time this point is used in processing, its
coordinates will be re-computed by averaging the available single-point
position data.
After processing, this check box is automatically deselected. The averaged
position is computed using single-point data from all selected occupations of
the selected point within the current session time. Activating this box does
not ensure that the point is used as a reference; however, this point is given
precedence over other non-reference points if the software is required to
select its own reference point during processing.
Adjustment section
The Adjustment section provides options to enable you to fix a points
coordinate values horizontally and/or vertically. This separation of values
enables you to select two or more distinct points to provide the
three-dimensional control used for network adjustments.
In the Adjustment section, check the appropriate box(es) to designate the
point. You may choose to fix a point both horizontally and vertically or one
point horizontally and another vertically; but you must have both a
horizontal and a vertical control point selected in order to perform an
adjustment.

Spectrum Survey

8-11

Chapter 8

Edit Data
The Adjustment section fields are:
Fix Horizontal .................. Fixes the latitude and longitude values of the
selected point
Fix Vertical ........................ Fixes the elevation value (ellipsoidal height) of the
selected point
For more information on fixing a point, see Section 12.3.2, Fix a point, Page
12-5.
Point coordinates section
The Point Coordinates section has several fields:
Coordinate System.......... Used to specify the coordinate system used to
display the coordinates for the selected point
The Coordinate System list contains the names of all coordinate systems
defined for the project; if this list is unsuitable, click the <Coordinate
System> button, beside the Coordinate System list, to select additional ones,
as described in the How To Define Map Projections, Ellipsoids & Datums
section of the Spectrum Survey Suite Advanced Reference Materials.
The Coordinate System list includes both planar and ellipsoidal coordinate
reference frames. Only one coordinate system name may be selected at once.

8-12

Note: if the selected point or point-occupation changes, the selected

coordinate system remains the same.

Spectrum Survey

Edit Data

Chapter 8
Geoid Model .................... Identifies the geoidal model applied to the project
A geoid model is used to describe the undulation applied to heights for
points in the project. If you want to change the associated geoid model, click
the <Geoid Model> button located to the right of this field to open the Geoid
Model Selection dialog box.

Use this dialog box to set the Current Model, Description, and Orthometric
Height for the geoid model.
By default, the Current Model list contains the options None, User, and
Fixed (additional options may be available depending upon your choices
when installing the Spectrum Survey software).
If you want to use an existing geoid file stored on your PC, click <Add> to
open a Select Geoid File dialog box. Using this dialog box, you can browse
your PC for a geoid file (*.geo, *.bin or *.grd). When you select your file, click
<Open> on the Geoid File dialog box to return to the Geoid Model Selection
dialog box. Look in the Current Model field to see the geoid file that you just
imported.
The Model Properties box will display either fields for you to enter
information when you select Fixed from the Current Model list, or
information about geoid file you imported into the software when you select
your imported file from the list.

Important: All imported geoid model files must reference the WGS84
datum.

For more information on Geoid Models and supported geoid file types, refer
to the Spectrum Survey Suite Advanced Reference Materials (See Section 1.10,
Additional Resources, Page 1-8).
Spectrum Survey

8-13

Chapter 8

Edit Data
Lat, Long and.................... Updated to display the point list in the
Ell. Height
selected coordinate system
Undulation and ............... Updated to display the values set for the
Orth. Height
geoid model in the Geoid Model Selection dialog
box
Control Points .................. Click this Control points catalog icon to open the
Control Points Catalog dialog box

When the Control Points Catalog dialog box is opened from within the
Point Editor, it enables you to update the coordinates of the currently
selected point with the coordinates from a point stored in your catalog.
Instructions for using the Control Points Catalog dialog box are analogous
to those in Section 8.3, Control Points, Page 8-2. However, when you open the
Control Points Catalog from the Point Editor, the following differences
apply:

8-14

The caption over the fields on the left side of the Control Points Catalog
dialog box will now read Project Point.

All fields on the left side of the Control Points Catalog dialog box
appear dimmed and are read-only.

The Name field will contain the name of the point currently selected in
the Point Editor at the time the Control Point Catalog dialog box was
accessed.

A new button labeled <Update> is seen in between the existing <Add>

and <Delete> buttons. This button will only be available if a control
point is selected in the Control Point Catalog window.

Spectrum Survey

Edit Data

Chapter 8
The purpose of the Control Points Catalog dialog box, when opened from
the Point Editor, is to update your current project point with coordinates that
you previously stored in your catalog. To do this, click on the corresponding
point in the Control Points Catalog window. The <Update> button will
become available.

Click <Update> to change the current project point coordinates to those

of the cataloged point. A message will appear directly below the fields in
the Project Point section telling you that the coordinates have been
updated with the coordinates of the point you selected.

Click <Ok> to apply the changes to the current project

Click <Cancel> to return to the Point Editor without making changes to

the coordinates.

Source ................................ Displays a static text message that indicates the

source of the current point coordinate. It could be
any of these possibilities:

Spectrum Survey

Static Message

Description

Field

obtained from the GPS receiver or data collector

Average

calculated through single-point averaging

Vector

computed from a processed vector, where<solution type> could

be any valid vector solution type.

Trajectory

obtained from a static occupation within a processed trajectory

where <solution type> could be any valid vector solution type.

User input

entered directly from the Point Editor dialog box

Adjustment (Free)

indicates if the currently displayed point coordinate is derived

from the solution of a free network adjustment

Adjustment (Constrained)

indicates if the currently displayed point coordinate is derived

from the solution of a constrained network adjustment

8-15

Chapter 8
8.4.1.3

Edit Data
Occupations tab
The Occupations tab is used to define characteristics that are specific to an
individual point occupation.

The following options are available on the Occupations tab:

Occupation........................ Used to select the point occupation to be edited.
The list contains the numbers of all point
occupations, for the currently selected points,
within the current session time for the project
Only one point occupation number may be selected at once. If an occupation
number is selected from the Occupation list, the other fields in the
Occupations tab update immediately to reflect the properties associated with
the selected point occupation.
Move ..................................To change the point to which a point-occupation
record is attached. The Move Point Occupation
dialog box opens:

The Move Point Occupation dialog box enables you to use a new point name
or an existing point name to change the point.

8-16

Spectrum Survey

Edit Data

Chapter 8
The Target Point list, on the Move Point Occupation dialog box, is used to
select a new point name with which to associate the currently selected
point-occupation. The contents of the list are the names of all points in the
current project. Only one point name may be selected at once. If you supply a
point name, it must conform to the naming conventions in Table 1, Naming
Convention, Page 8-8.
If you move the point position to within 50 meters of another point (inducing
a zero vector condition at the new point), a dialog box prompts you to
confirm that two (or more) occupations are to occupy the point
simultaneously.
If the new point name is valid, a dialog box will prompt you to confirm that
you wish to move the occupation to the new point name. If you confirm the
move, the currently selected point occupation record in the Point Editor
dialog box is moved from its current point, to the point that was identified in
the Target Point field. If this point name does not yet exist, a new point is
created with that name. The new point contains one occupation,
corresponding to the one currently selected in the Point Editor dialog box.
As well, if you attempt to move a point a distance which exceeds the value
set on the Blunder Detection page of the Project Setting dialog box (see
Section 5.2.4, Blunder detection tab, Page 5-7), you will be prompted with the
message:
"Possible blunder: the target point '<pointname>' is more than <value> <units>
from the computed position for the selected occupation.\n\n. Do you still want to
move the occupation there?".
You can choose to go ahead with the move or cancel.
After a move, the contents of the Occupation list, on the Occupation tab, no
longer contains the number of the point occupation that was just moved. If
the moved occupation was the only occupation for the current point, the
point record is removed from the database.

Spectrum Survey

8-17

Chapter 8

Edit Data
Occupation information section
The Occupation Information section of the Occupation tab has the following
fields:
Obs File ID ...................... Displays the name of the observation file ID
associated with the current point occupation
selected for editing
Start Time .........................Contains the occupation start time defined for the
currently selected point occupation
The Start Time specified for the occupation must be within the time span of
the observation file associated with the point occupation.
As well, the start time specified cannot overlap with the time span for any
other point occupation defined by the same observation file. If the specified
start time overlaps with another occupation time span for the same point
(zero vector condition), a dialog box will appear to alert you.
End Time .......................... Contains the occupation end time defined for the
currently selected point occupation. A description
of these fields is analogous to that of the Start Time
fields
Note.................................... Enables you to enter notes about the point. Click
the button to open the Notes dialog box:

Antenna measures section

The Antenna Measures section has several fields:
Model ................................ Displays the name of the antenna model to be
associated with the point occupation

8-18

Spectrum Survey

Edit Data

Chapter 8
The records in the Model list are the names of the available antenna models.
If a new antenna model name is selected, the value displayed in the Height
text field changes to reflect the application of the new antenna model to the
points measured height.
If the list of available antenna models is unsuitable, click the ellipsis <...>
button beside the Model list to invoke the Antenna Models tab of the Tools |
Options dialog box (for more information, see Section 3.4.1.4, Antenna
models, Page 3-15).
Meas. height ..................... Enables you to change the measured height value
for the antenna during the selected point
occupation
Valid range of values is 0 to 100.0 (any unit),
with a default of 0
Measured height is displayed as a positive value
with a precision of three decimal places
For every point occupation this value exists; the measured antenna height is
always defined. When a new point occupation record is created, a default
measured height of 0.0 is provided.

Note: The units for the measured height value are the same as the units
for the current coordinate system.

When specifying new measured heights you must ensure that the new value
is greater than the radius specified for the current model.
NGS ID ............................. Displays the NGS ID associated with the currently
selected model
Vertical height .................Displays the vertical height that results from
applying the currently selected antenna model to
the value in the Meas. Height field
Height is non-editable, automatically computed,
and is displayed with a precision of three
decimal places

Spectrum Survey

8-19

Chapter 8

Edit Data
The units attached to the vertical height agree with the current antenna
model for the selected point occupation.
Meteorological measures section
The Meteorological Measures section has several fields:
Dry Temp .........................Displays the dry temperature default value of
18.0 C
Pressure ............................ Displays the ambient pressure default value of
1013.25 mbar
Humidity .......................... Displays the relative humidity default value of
50%
Use Default Mets............. Indicates that processing connected to this point
occupation will use standard meteorological
measures. This check box is always selected

8.4.2

Rover editor
The role of the Rover Editor is to enable you to edit rover-specific
information, such as to correct the antenna height for the observation file or
to modify any configuration measurement.
Access the Rover Editor dialog box by selecting Edit | Rover, by
double-clicking on a rover in the plan view, or by using the shortcut menu
(right click), when pointing at a rover, to select Edit Rover.

8-20

Spectrum Survey

Edit Data

Chapter 8
The Rover Editor has several fields:
Rover .................................Enables you to select the rover whose properties
are to be edited. This field is a list containing the
names of all rovers within the current session time
for the project

Note: The Rover list includes records that have the File Contains Rover
Data flag set, as explained in Section 6.3, Observations Tab, Page 6-13.
Only one rover may be selected at a time.

Start Time .........................Displays the start time for the selected rover,
which corresponds to the first time tag found in the
rover observation file
End Time .......................... Displays the end time for the selected rover, which
corresponds to the last time tag found in the rover
observation file
Antenna Measures .......... For Model, Meas. Height, NGS ID, and Vertical
Height field descriptions, Antenna measures section,
Page 8-18
Meteorological .................For Dry Temp, Pressure, and Humidity
Measures
field descriptions, Meteorological measures section,
Page 8-20
Use Default Mets............. Meteorological measures section, Page 8-20 for a
description of this field
<Points> ............................ To view the number of point occupations
associated with the rover data file. This list is for
information purposes only, and selecting point
occupations has no effect

8.5

Edit Session Time

The Session Time dialog box enables you to edit the current time span for
your project. You would typically only need to change the time span if data
collection took place over a period of many days and you wished to limit
your displayed data to a specific day.

Spectrum Survey

8-21

Chapter 8

Edit Data
Select Edit | Session Time to open the Session Time dialog box.

When you set the time span, you define a window of time for the project:
only data within this time window is accessible for editing.

Note: Editing the time span does not affect the data accessible for
analysis and export.

If a new observation file is imported into your project that contains data
outside of the current session time, the session start and/or end time is
automatically modified to include the new observation file. If any
observation file is deleted from a project, the session time span is
re-computed for the project.
The first Start and End edit fields display the dates for the session and the
last fields display the times. To adjust the time span so that it covers the
entire project, click <Fit All>.
Time can be displayed in the time fields in either GPS, UTC, or local time.
You can set the time format in the Time window under Tools | Options.
If you specify a session time that does not include or exclude an entire
observation file, the Session Time Selection dialog box will appear.

Select a valid session time, then click on <OK>.

8-22

Spectrum Survey

Edit Data

8.6

Chapter 8

Select Raw Data for Processing

Once you have completed editing your raw data, it is time to select which
data to process. You can graphically select points and rovers by choosing
View | Select from the menu. The pointer on the screen then appears as a
finger , with which you can create a selection box by holding down the left
mouse button while dragging the mouse. On the Plan View, selected items
appear brighter than deselected items. For more information and options on
selecting items on the Plan View, see Section 3.2.3, View controls, Page 3-9.

8.6.1

Point selection
Choosing Select | Point from the main menu brings up the Point List dialog
box, which is used to select specific point and point occupation records.

The Point List dialog box has two tabbed windows: Occupations and
Coordinates. Each window has a main window that lists all selectable points
and individual point occupations. The displayed list is limited to points and
point-occupations that are completely within the current session time.
At the bottom of the Point List dialog box are the following buttons:
<Expand All> ................... To show all the occupation records associated with
each point
<Compress All>............... To hide all occupation records associated with each
point, and to see only a list of point names

Spectrum Survey

8-23

Chapter 8
8.6.1.1

Edit Data
Occupations tab
The Point List dialog boxs main window on the Occupations tab enables
you to view or hide individual point occupations in much the same way as
the folders on your computers hard drive are compressed or expanded to
hide or show their contents.
Point records are preceded by a <+> (plus) sign, which, when clicked, will
expand to display a list of occupation records for that point. When the list is
expanded, the <+> sign is replaced with a <-> (minus) sign. If you click the
<-> sign, the list of available occupation records compress, leaving only the
point record visible.
Multiple records can be highlighted by holding down the <Ctrl> key. A
record is considered selected if the check box to the left of the record is
selected.
The Occupations window displays the point information under the
following headings:
Point Occupation............. The 2-digit occupation number for the point
Start Time.......................... Start time for the point
Duration ............................ Time span of the point occupation (displayed to
the nearest integer second)
Ant. Model........................ Name of the antenna model associated with the
point occupation. This entry can be edited in the
Antenna Settings group at the bottom of the
dialog box
Meas. Ht. ........................... Measured height value for the antenna during
point occupation. This entry can be edited in the
Antenna Settings group at the bottom of the
dialog box
Vert. Ht. ............................. Computed vertical antenna height for the point
occupation, in user-specified units. This entry will
be recalculated after applying changes to the fields
in the Antenna Settings group at the bottom of the
dialog box

8-24

Spectrum Survey

Edit Data

Chapter 8
File ID ............................... File ID of the observation file associated with this
point occupation record
The Occupations tab has a Selected for Processing check box that enables
you to select a point for processing. The check box is directly connected to the
check box that appears to the left of every occupation in the main window of
the Occupations tab. Even when a point record is not expanded, you can see
if some or all point occupations have been selected for processing by looking
at the status of the Selected for Processing check box.
The Occupations tab also has an Antenna Settings section which displays
the following fields that update according to the occupation selected from
the main window:
Model.................................Displays the name of the antenna model to be
associated with the point occupation. This is a list;
the records in the list are the names of the available
antenna models
Radius................................ Automatically displays a value for the currently
selected antenna model, representing the distance
from the center of the antennas vertical axis to the
antenna height measurement point
Offset .................................Displays a value for the currently selected antenna
model, representing the vertical offset from the
antenna height measurement point, and the
antennas phase centre (mechanical)
Meas. Height .................... Enables you to change the measured height value
for the antenna during the selected point
occupation. The new height must be greater than
or equal to the value in the Radius field for the
current antenna model
Valid range of values is 0.000 to 99.999, the unit
of measure is meters
Measured height is displayed as a positive value
with a precision of 3 decimal places

Spectrum Survey

8-25

Chapter 8

Edit Data
<Apply> ............................ Applies the antenna settings from the Antenna
Settings group to all highlighted point occupation
records. Changes made without using <Apply>
are not applied

8.6.1.2

Note: If any point/occupation was deselected through use of the dialog

box, then any vector occupations connected to the deselected point
occupation are also deselected. If the point at the other end of one of
these deselected vectors does not have any of its point occupations
connected to other objects that are selected for processing, then this end
point is also deselected. Any trajectory connected to the deselected point
occupation is deselected. A rover associated with the trajectory is also
deselected, but only if it is not associated with any other trajectory
objects that are currently selected for processing.

Coordinates tab
The Point List dialog boxs main window on the Coordinates tab enables
you to view the point name, point coordinates in the current project
coordinate system, and the point control settings.

The Coordinates window displays the point information under the following
headings:
Point Occupation ............ Displays the name of the point occupation

8-26

Spectrum Survey

Edit Data

Chapter 8
Latitude ............................. Displays the latitude position (or northing
coordinate) for the point occupation
Longitude.......................... Displays the longitude position (or easting
coordinate) for the point occupation
Ell. Hgt............................... Displays the ellipsoidal height. If the Orthometric
Heights check box is selected on the Coordinates
tab, this column heading will change to Ortho. Hgt
and measurements for all point occupations will be
displayed as orthometric heights
Control............................... Shows which points are used as reference for GPS
processing (G) and which points are used as
control points in an adjustment (H and/or V). If
controls have been applied, this column will
display a combination of G, H and V where
G = Use as GPS Reference Coordinate, H = Fix
Horizontally and V = Fix Vertically
When you click on a point occupation in the Coordinates window, the details
for that point occupation display in the Settings section at the bottom of the
Coordinates tab. You can choose to change the point occupation settings by
editing the Latitude (or Northing), Longitude (or Easting) and Height
fields.
The Control field can also be edited by clicking the ellipsis button <...>
located to the right of the field. A Point Control Options dialog box appears
that enables you to choose your control settings by clicking the check boxes.

If none or more than one point are selected in the Coordinates window, no
settings can be edited and the Point Name field will appear empty.

Spectrum Survey

8-27

Chapter 8

Edit Data

Note: If any controls for that point were selected by the software, the
controls will be checked and will appear dimmed. If you want to change
these settings you have to deselect the check box (click in it) then you can
decide if you want to select this option.

When you finish setting the controls, click <OK> to return to the Point List
dialog box. Click <Apply> to update the control information in the
Coordinates window.

8.6.2

Note: Changes made to point occupations will not be applied to the

project unless you select <OK> to exit the Point List dialog box.

Rover selection
Choosing Select | Rover from the menu brings up the Rover Selection
screen, which is used to select specific rover records.

The main window is used to list all rovers available within the current
session time. Records can be selected in this dialog box in the same way as
explained in Section 8.6.1, Point selection, Page 8-23.

8-28

Note: Rovers are only listed if they have the File Contains Rover Data
flag set, as explained in Section 6.3, Observations Tab, Page 6-13.

Spectrum Survey

Edit Data

Chapter 8
Each rover record in the list window shows information, which you cannot
modify, under several headings:
Rover..................................Name associated with each rover record in the list
Start Time.......................... Earliest time tag found in rovers observation file
Duration ............................ Total time span of the rovers associated
observation file
Ant. Model,....................... The description of these fields is analogous to
Meas. Ht. and
to those in the Point List dialog box.
Vert. Ht.
See Section 8.6.1, Point selection, Page 8-23
The fields, found in the Antenna Settings group, are not available for editing
until a rover occupation is selected from the main window of the Rover List
dialog box. The description of the fields is analogous to those found on the
Point List dialog box (see Section 8.6.1, Point selection, Page 8-23 for more
information).

Spectrum Survey

8-29

Chapter 9

Process Data
After you data is imported, edited and selected for post-processing, the next
step is to process the data.
Spectrum Survey will process your data based on the settings that you have
defined up to this point. After processing, you can view your network and
evaluate the quality of the computed vector and trajectory solutions. It is also
possible to select specific vectors for reprocessing after processing is
complete; if you decide that you need to edit the vector processing
parameters or occupation duration to improve the computed solution.

9.1

Initial Processing
Select Tools | Process Data from the main menu to automatically process
your data.
Before processing your data, Spectrum Survey will verify that all point
antenna heights fall within the ranges specified in your blunder detection
settings (see Section 5.2.4, Blunder detection tab, Page 5-7), and that at least one
of the points selected is a reference point. If any of this information is
missing, Spectrum Survey will alert you with message boxes. As your data is
processed, the colors of your network will change accordingly (see Table 3,
Processing Colors, Page 9-35 for more information). If your data processes
without error, and you decide not to edit any of the vector occupations and
reprocess, proceed now to Chapter 10, Analyze Process Results.

9.2

Reprocessing
If after initial processing you want to refine your data, or you discover
potential blunders that result in you editing data, you will need to reprocess.
Information available for editing includes:

Spectrum Survey

Editing point information (see See Chapter 8, Edit Data)

9-1

Chapter 9

Process Data

Defining point and rover combinations (see Section 9.2.1, Define

combinations, Page 9-2)

Editing vectors and trajectories (see Section 9.3, Vectors & Trajectories,
Page 9-4)

Editing process parameters (see Section 9.3.6, Process parameters, Page

9-20)

When you finish editing the data for processing, select the objects you want
to process (see Section 9.3.7, Select objects, Page 9-31) and process that data
(see Section 9.3.8, Process, Page 9-34).
The following sections explain these steps in further detail.

9.2.1

Define combinations
Before processing your data, you can check to see if your network
configuration is defined how you expect. With your project open, and
depending if you performed a static or kinematic survey, your Plan View
should resemble one of the following:

9-2

Spectrum Survey

Process Data

Chapter 9
To modify your current network configuration, select
Tools | Define Combinations to bring up the Define Combinations dialog
box.

The Define Combinations dialog box is used to configure and then execute
automatic network generation for the project.

Note: By default, the Auto generate combinations on import check box

is selected in Spectrum Survey, and the data in your project would have
been automatically generated as a network when you imported the data
into the project. At this point, you may choose to change some of the
network parameters and redefine the combinations.

Ensure that the values on the Define Combinations dialog box reflect how
you wish to define your network, then click <OK> (for information on fields,
see Section 3.4.1.6, Combinations, Page 3-19). The network will begin to
generate automatically, and progress dialogs will display to show you the
progress.

Spectrum Survey

Note: Vectors and trajectories will only be generated using points and
rovers that are currently selected (see Section 8.6, Select Raw Data for
Processing, Page 8-23).

9-3

Chapter 9

Process Data
If you selected the Define Vectors check box, Spectrum Survey deletes all
unprocessed vectors that were not manually created (see Section 9.3.2, Edit
vectors, Page 9-6). For each pair of selected point occupations that overlap the
defined minimum amount of time, a vector is created and selected for
processing.
If you select the Exlude Rover Data check box in this section, point s
occupied by rovers (kinematic files) will not be included in the vector
creation process, even if they are selected. This check box can only be edited
if the Define Vectors check box is selected.
If you selected the Define Trajectories check box, Spectrum Survey deletes
all the unprocessed trajectories that were not manually created (see Section
9.3.4, Edit trajectories, Page 9-14). For each selected point occupation that
overlaps a rover by the defined minimum amount of time, a trajectory is
created and selected for processing.
When these actions are complete, the Plan View displays points, rovers, and
potential vectors and trajectories.

9.3

Note: If a base point exists for a differential trajectory, the base point is
shown connected to any rover point occupation by means of a dotted
line.

Vectors & Trajectories

A vector is defined as a solution between two occupations from different
observation files. For a discussion on vectors and trajectories, See Appendix
A, Spectrum Survey Concepts.
Once the program has defined vectors and trajectories, you can edit them
before launching into processing. It is also possible to remove vectors and
trajectories from your project.

9-4

Spectrum Survey

Process Data

9.3.1

Chapter 9

Delete vectors & trajectories

If you want to remove vectors or trajectories, right-click the vector or
trajectory in the Plan View and select Remove Vector or Remove Trajectory
from the shortcut menu; or, select Tools | Project Editor from the main menu
to access the Project Editor dialog box.

Click the vectors or trajectories to select which are to be deleted, and select
the Delete Selected Items check box. If you want to delete all the vectors in
the project, select the Delete Results check box. Click <OK> to delete the
selected items (see Section 5.8, Edit an Existing Project, Page 5-15).
Also, it is possible to delete any vectors and trajectories previously generated
by Define Combinations, provided that those vectors and trajectories do not
have results attached to them. This is done by selecting Tools | Define
Combinations from the main menu to access the Define Combinations
dialog box and deselecting the appropriate check box.

Vectors and trajectories previously generated are overwritten each time the
Define Combinations is run.

Spectrum Survey

9-5

Chapter 9

9.3.2

Process Data

Edit vectors
The Vector Editor dialog box appears when you select Edit | Vector from the
menu, double-click on a vector in the Plan View, or use the shortcut menu
(right click) with the mouse pointer over a vector in the Plan View. Use the
Vector Editor to edit vector occupation times, fix vectors for GPS processing,
set solution weights for adjusting processed vectors and view the processing
and adjustment results.

A Vector list appears at the top of the Vector Editor dialog box. Choose from
this list the vector that you would like to edit. As well, the Vector Editor
dialog box has three tabs:

Occupations (Page 9-7)

Processing (Page 9-9)

Adjustment (Page 9-11).

Each tab has an Occupation list that contains the 2-digit vector occupation
number for all occupations of the currently selected vector, within the current
session time. Only one occupation number may be selected at once.
At the bottom of the Vector Editor dialog box is the Filter section, whose
options enable you to filter the displayed vectors based on whether they
have been processed or adjusted. Only one filter may be selected at once.
Select one of four options to display vectors: All (all vectors within the
session time), Unprocessed, Processed, or Adjusted.

9-6

Spectrum Survey

Process Data

Chapter 9
When you choose a filter option, the list of vectors available in the
Occupation list, found on all tabs, reflects to display only those vectors that
match the option you selected. By default, the list of vectors available in the
Occupation list includes all vectors within the current session time for the
project.
The Vector Editor dialog box has the following buttons:
<New> ............................... To manually create a vector occupation from
existing point occupations (see Section 9.3.3, New
vector occupation, Page 9-12)
<Parameters>.................... To assign specific processing parameters to an
individual vector occupation (see Section 9.3.6,
Process parameters, Page 9-20)

9.3.2.1

Vector occupations tab

The Occupations window is the first tabbed window on the Vector Editor
dialog box. This window enables you to edit the duration for the vector
occupation selected in the Occupation list.

The Point 1 field shows the endpoint of the selected vector whose point
name is first alphabetically. Similarly, the Point 2 field shows the occupation
of the selected vector whose point name comes second.

Spectrum Survey

9-7

Chapter 9

Process Data
Information about the points is shown under these headings:
Point Name ....................... Name of a point in the current vector occupation
Point Occ. .......................... The 2-digit occupation number
Obs File ID ....................... Observation file ID of the file associated with the
point
The Vector Occupation Common Times section displays two graphic boxes,
Point 1 and Point 2, which provide a visual representation of the time
overlap between the occupation time at point 1 and the occupation time at
point 2.
The total width of each graphic box represents the total time between the
earliest time for either point occupation, and the latest time for either point
occupation. As well, each graphic box contains a time bar that represents the
total point occupation time at a given point.
The position of the time bar within either graphic box is relative to the
location of that points occupation time within the total time period. The
portion of the time bar that corresponds to times or epochs that are shared by
both Point 1 and Point 2 occupations is displayed as a different color than
the rest.
The Vector Occupation Common Times section also consists of the
following fields:
Start Time.......................... Consists of two fields that contain the user-selected
date and start time for the selected vector
occupation. The Start Time is defined for every
vector record
By default, the value of this field equals the
earliest possible start time
The specified start time must be within the time
overlap between the vectors two point
occupations

9-8

Spectrum Survey

Process Data

Chapter 9
End Time ........................... Consists of two fields that contain the user-selected
date and end time for the selected vector
occupation. The End Time is defined for every
vector record
By default, the value of this field equals the
latest possible end time
The specified end time must be within the time
overlap between the vectors two point
occupations
Duration ........................... Display the processing time for the vector
occupation as defined by the Start Time and End
Time fields, and the Start Time and End Time text
fields, respectively

9.3.2.2

Vector processing tab

The Processing tabbed window enables you to fix vector occupations for
initialization in GPS processing. After processing, this tabbed window will
display the processed results for the vector occupation selected in the
Occupation list. As well, you can use this window to apply solution weight
options to processed vector occupations for adjustment.

The following fields are found on the Processing window:

Occupation........................ See Section 9.3.2, Edit vectors, Page 9-6

Spectrum Survey

9-9

Chapter 9

Process Data
Fix Vector for .................... When selected will enable you to specify a
GPS Initialization
vector as truth to aid in the processing of data
associated with the vector

Caution: This feature is not necessary for most projects and should only
be done by advanced users.

If you click this check box, the vector seen in the Processed Vector section of
the dialog box will be treated as truth for any processing associated with this
vector. The components of the selected vector will not change, but the
content of the Occupation list will change to User, enabling editing of the
position values in the Processed Vector section.
Coordinate System.......... Contains all coordinate systems that are defined
for the current project.
Next to the list is an ellipsis <> button that provides access to the Standard
Projection Management Interface (Refer to the Spectrum Survey Suite
Advanced Reference Materials document). Changing the coordinate system
using this list will enable you to see the current processed solution in a
different coordinate system
dX, dY and dZ .................. Displays the vector solution for the currently
selected vector occupation
By default, the component are derived from the coordinates of the two points
that define the vector; but if the vector occupation has been processed, then
the vector components from the last processed solution of the occupation are
displayed.
The results are presented in the currently selected coordinate system, will all
vector components presented in the linear units associated with this system.
For coordinate projections, the vector components are presented as Northing,
Easting, and ellipsoidal height differences.
If you selected User in the Occupation list, you can change the values in
these fields.

9-10

Spectrum Survey

Process Data

Chapter 9
Status, RMS ...................... Displays messages indicating the solution
Length & Processed
type and quality (RMS value), length, and
processing date/time associated with each vector
occupation
If the current selection in the Occupation list is User, then this message will
not be seen. If the occupation has not yet been processed, then the message
reads Unprocessed and no RMS value is shown.
Solution Weight............... Enables you to set the weight for the current vector
occupation that will be applied during adjustment
The weight indicates the amount of influence that will be applied by each
vector in a network. The greater the weight value applied to this processed
vector solution, the less the vector will shift during adjustment. For more
information, see Section 12.3.5, Apply weight settings, Page 12-12.
Exclude from .................... Select this check box to exclude the current
Adjustment
vector from the list of vectors to be adjusted

9.3.2.3

Vector adjustment tab

The Adjustment tabbed window displays the adjusted results for the vector
occupation selected in the Occupation list.

The following fields are found in the Adjustment window:

Occupation........................ See Section 9.3.2, Edit vectors, Page 9-6

Spectrum Survey

9-11

Chapter 9

Process Data
Coordinate System.......... This field is analogous to that in Section 9.3.2.2,
Vector processing tab, Page 9-9
dX, dY, dZ, Length........... This field is analogous to that in Section 9.3.2.2,
Vector processing tab, Page 9-9
Std. Dev............................. Displays the respective standard deviation values
associated with each adjusted vector component
Residual ............................ Displays the respective residual values associated
with each adjusted vector component
By default, the vector component fields are all set to zero; but if the vector
occupation has been adjusted, then the vector components for the adjusted
observation are displayed. The results are presented in the currently selected
coordinate system.
All vector components are presented in the linear units associated with the
current coordinate system. For coordinate projections, the vector components
are presented as Northing, Easting, and ellipsoidal height differences.

9.3.3

New vector occupation

You would choose to create a new vector, using the New Vector Occupation
dialog box, if the vector falls outside the parameters entered into the Define
Combinations dialog box (see Section 9.2.1, Define combinations, Page 9-2).
From the New Vector Occupation dialog box, opened by clicking <New> in
the Vector Editor dialog box, you can manually create a new vector
occupation from existing point occupations.

9-12

Spectrum Survey

Process Data

Chapter 9
All project points whose occupation times are completely within the current
session time are visible for the creation of a new vector occupation. If the
specified vector occupation is for a vector that does not yet exist, then
creating a new vector occupation effectively creates a new vector as well. The
same point may be used to define a new vector (zero vector), but never the
same point occupation.
The Vector field displays the name of the vector to which the new occupation
is being added. The vector name displayed is derived from the name fields of
the two points currently selected in the Point 1 and Point 2 portions of the
dialog box.
The Point 1 section has several fields, which display the:
Name..................................Name for Point 1 of the vector occupation
currently being considered. This field contains the
names of all project points available within the
current session time. Only one point may be
selected at once
Occupation........................ 2-digit occupation number associated with the
selected point. This field contains all point
occupations available for the current session time.
Only occupations from different data files are
allowed to create zero vectors
Obs File ID ....................... (Observation File ID) For the file associated with
the currently selected point-occupation in the
Point 1 portion of the dialog box
The Point 2 section is analogous to that of Point 1.
The Vector Occupation Common Times section is identical to the
corresponding one in the Vector Editor dialog box (See Section 9.3.2, Edit
vectors, Page 9-6) with the following exceptions:

Spectrum Survey

If the files associated with the point occupations selected for the new
vector occupation do not have any common time, then the Start Time
and End Time fields are not active and are empty; the text fields to the
right of the Start Time and End Time fields are empty; and the Duration
field reads No common time found.
9-13

Chapter 9

Process Data

If the Duration field does not contain a valid time (For Example, the No
common time found message) the new vector occupation cannot be
created. If the Duration field is zero (0.00 minutes), the new vector
occupation cannot be created.

Click on <Cancel> to discard all changes.

Click on <Create> to cause a new vector occupation to be created based upon
the data found in the various fields of the New Vector Occupation dialog
box. The vector occupation number for the new record is equal to the last
occupation number for the vector, plus one.
If the vector specified for the occupation does not yet exist, a new vector
object is created and the newly defined occupation is assigned to it
(occupation number 01).
Before a new vector is created, a message appears asking Do you want to
create a permanent vector occupation record? Click <Yes> to generate the new
vector.
An error message is displayed and vector creation is aborted if:

9.3.4

The vector occupation specified uses the same point occupation twice

The new vector occupation defined in the dialog box already exists

There is no common time between the two point occupations

Edit trajectories
The Trajectory Editor dialog box is accessed by selecting Edit | Trajectory,
double-clicking on a trajectory in the Plan View, or selecting the Edit
Trajectory option from the shortcut menu (right click) while on a trajectory in
the Plan View.

9-14

Spectrum Survey

Process Data

Chapter 9
Use the Trajectory Editor to edit trajectory duration, set solution weights for
adjusting processed trajectories and view the trajectory processing and
adjustment results.

At the top of the Trajectory Editor dialog box is the Trajectory list that
displays the name of the trajectory currently selected for editing. This list
contains the names of all project trajectories within the current session time.
For more information on trajectories, See Appendix A, Spectrum Survey
Concepts.
You may limit the list of available trajectories by selecting one of the options
in the Filter section, located at the bottom of the Trajectory Editor dialog box.
This Filter section provides options that enable you to filter the trajectories
based on whether they have been processed or adjusted. Select one of four
options to display trajectories:

All (all trajectories within the session time)

Unprocessed

Processed

Adjusted (Only one trajectory may be selected at once)

Spectrum Survey

Note: Processed and adjusted vector information (trajectory sites) will

not be present for those trajectories that do not include rover site
occupations.

9-15

Chapter 9

Process Data
The Trajectory Editor dialog box has three tabs:

General (Page 9-16)

Processing (Page 9-17)

Adjustment (Page 9-18)

The Trajectory Editor dialog box has the following buttons:

<New> ............................... To manually create a new trajectory from existing
point occupations (See Section 9.3.5, New trajectory,
Page 9-19)
<Parameters>.................... To assign specific processing parameters to an
individual trajectory (see Section 9.3.6, Process
parameters, Page 9-20)
9.3.4.1

Trajectory general tab

The General window is the first tabbed window on the Trajectory Editor
dialog box. Use this window to edit the trajectory start and end times.

The General tab of the Trajectory Editor has the field Number of Points
Visited that enables you to view the number of points visited by the rover in
the trajectory.

9-16

Spectrum Survey

Process Data

Chapter 9
As well, the Trajectory Editor has a Trajectory Segment Common Times
section which displays two graphic boxes, Base and Rover, that provide a
visual representation of the time overlap between the occupation time at the
base point and the time span of the rover.
The total width of each graphic box represents the total time between the
earliest and latest time for either point occupation or rover.
The position of the time bar within each graphic box is analogous to that seen
in the Vector Editor dialog box. See Section 9.3.2, Edit vectors, Page 9-6.
The Trajectory Segment Common Times section also has Start Time, End
Time, and Duration fields that are described analogously in Section 9.3.2,
Edit vectors, Page 9-6.

9.3.4.2

Trajectory processing tab

The Processing tabbed window enables you to view processed results for
point occupations made during the time span of the trajectory. These
trajectory points are analogous to static vector occupations except that the
remote file used in processing is kinematic during part of its time span.

Spectrum Survey

9-17

Chapter 9

Process Data
The Processing tab fields are all described analogously in Section 9.3.2.2,
Vector processing tab, Page 9-9, with the following exceptions:
Trajectory point................Displays the list of point names (followed by its
occupation number in brackets) associated with
the selected trajectory. This list contains all point
occupations made by the rover during the current
trajectory time span
Dx, Dy, Dz.........................Display the vector components for the observation
between the trajectory base point and the currently
selected trajectory point

9.3.4.3

Trajectory adjustment tab

The Adjustment tabbed window enables you to view the adjusted vector
components for trajectory sites used in network adjustment computations.

The Adjustment tab options for a trajectory are analogous to the vector
description found in Section 9.3.2.3, Vector adjustment tab, Page 9-11.

9-18

Spectrum Survey

Process Data

9.3.5

Chapter 9

New trajectory
The New Trajectory dialog box appears when you click <New> in the
Trajectory Editor dialog box (see Section 9.3.4, Edit trajectories, Page 9-14).
Use this dialog box to manually create a new trajectory, from existing rovers
and point occupations, whose parameters fall outside the parameters entered
into the Define Combinations dialog box (see Section 9.2.1, Define
combinations, Page 9-2).

All point occupations and rovers completely within the current session time
are visible for the creation of a new trajectory.
The Trajectory field displays the name for the trajectory to be created. If the
Base Point and/or Rover name fields are changed, then the name in the
Trajectory field will also change to display the correct name for a trajectory
between the modified base and rover.
The Base Point section has several fields, which display the:
Name..................................Name for the Base point used to define the new
trajectory. This field lists the names of all project
points containing occupations within the current
session time. Only one base point may be selected
at once
Occupation........................ 2-digit occupation number associated with the
selected point. This field lists all occupations
available for the selected point in the current
session time. Only one point occupation number
may be selected at once

Spectrum Survey

9-19

Chapter 9

Process Data
Obs File ID ....................... Observation File ID associated with the currently
displayed point occupation
The Rover section has only one field, the Name list, which displays the name
of the rover used to create the new trajectory. This name is the same as the
Obs File ID for the associated rover observation file. This list contains the
names of all rovers within the current session time. Only one rover may be
selected at once.
The fields in the Trajectory Segment Common Times are analogous to those
described for the Trajectory Editor dialog box (see Section 9.3.4, Edit
trajectories, Page 9-14) with one exception. If the base point and rover
observation files selected for the new trajectory do not have any common
time, the Start Time and End Time fields are disabled, and the Duration
field reads No common time found.
Click on <Create> to cause a new trajectory record to be created based upon
the data found in the various fields of the New Trajectory dialog box. If the
Duration field contains the message No common time found, or if the
Duration field is zero (0.00 minutes), the new trajectory cannot be created. If
the new trajectory defined by the dialog box already exists, an error dialog
box is displayed. Before a new trajectory is created, a message appears asking
Do you really want to create a permanent trajectory record?.
Click on <Yes> to generate the new trajectory, or click on <Cancel> to
discard all changes.

9.3.6

Process parameters
Two types of processing parameters exist:
Global ................................ Processing options that affect the entire project are
called global parameters
The global (default) parameters are accessible through Edit | Process
Parameters and establish which global parameters are used while processing
points, rovers, vectors, and trajectories. The global parameters are specific to
a given project.

9-20

Spectrum Survey

Process Data

Chapter 9
Trial-specific..................... Processing options specific to a vector or trajectory
are called trial-specific parameters
The trial-specific parameters are accessible through the Edit | Vector and
Edit | Trajectory dialogs. A <Parameters> button is featured in the lower
right corner of the window.
When clicked, <Parameters> opens a Process Parameters window that is
used to override the global parameters and provide custom settings for
individual vectors and trajectories.
The tabbed windows in the global and trial-specific Process Parameters
dialogs are identical with the exception that the trial-specific tabs have a Use
Default Process Parameters check box. This check box forces global
parameters to be used while processing the trial, and is always selected by
default. If this check box is unchecked, Spectrum Survey uses the
trial-specific values that you have entered into the fields of the dialog box.

9.3.6.1

Setting parameters
Parameters are set in the Process Parameters dialog box which is opened by
selecting Edit | Process Parameters from the main menu:

The following buttons are located at the bottom of the Process Parameters
dialog box:
<Defaults> ........................ To return all parameters on all tabs to their default
values. If you do this while editing trial-specific
parameters, it is equivalent to clicking on the Use
Default Process Parameters check boxes

Spectrum Survey

9-21

Chapter 9

Process Data
<Page Defaults> .............. To return the parameters in the active tab to their
default values. If you do this while editing
trial-specific parameters, this is equivalent to
clicking on the Use Default Process Parameters
check boxes
The Process Parameters dialog box has three tabs:

Basic (Page 9-22)

Satellites (Page 9-23)

Advanced (Page 9-24).

Basic Tab
The Basic tabbed window contains the parameters that are most commonly
modified.

Elevation Mask ................Specifies the minimum elevation of a satellite for

its observations to be used
Valid range of values is an integer of 0 to 90,
with a default of 15
A typical value might range from 5 - 10 on a flat prairie, to 25 - 35 in a
forested area. Decreasing the mask angle enables the GPS receiver to see
more satellites, but at the same time increases the susceptibility to multipath
errors.
Use Precise........................ Select this check box to force the processing
Ephemeris
to use precise ephemeris data if it is available

9-22

Spectrum Survey

Process Data

Chapter 9
Generate Vector ............... Select this check box to generate a residual
Residuals
file for each vector processed
Generate ............................ Select this check box to generate a residual
Trajectory Residuals
file for each trajectory processed
Satellite Tab
The Satellites tab enables you to specify the satellites that are not to be used
for processing, over a given time span.

The List of Rejected SVs section contains a list of all of the satellites and
when they are to be omitted from processing. Each record in the list contains
the PRN of the rejected satellite and the start and end time during which the
satellite is to be rejected. If a satellite is completely omitted the word
Always is shown after the PRN in place of the start and end times.
The following fields allow you to modify the settings of the currently
selected record in the SV Rejection Setting section:
SV ....................................... Used to change the satellite PRN in the currently
selected record in the Rejected Satellites list; the
GPS satellite PRN must be between 1 and 36
Always............................... Enables you to completely omit the satellite
(specified in the currently selected record) from
processing

Spectrum Survey

9-23

Chapter 9

Process Data
Time Span .........................Enables you to omit the satellite (specified in the
currently selected record) from processing during
the specified time span. When you click this
button, the start and end time fields become
enabled. The begin time fields specify the start of
the time span that the satellite is omitted
The begin time must be on or after GPS Time 0
and on or before the current end time
The end time must be on or after the current
begin time
<Add>................................ Add a new record to the Rejected Satellites list
<Remove> .........................Remove the satellite rejection record currently
selected in the Rejected Satellites list
Reject Unhealthy ............. Used to reject any satellites that are flagged
SVs
unhealthy in the satellites broadcast message
Advanced Tab
The Advanced tab is subdivided into three categories, which can be selected
from the Category window.

9-24

Spectrum Survey

Process Data

Chapter 9
For each category selected, a different set of processing parameters is
available:

Process Parameters (Page 9-25)

Standard Deviations (Page 9-28)

Process Interval (Page 9-30)

Warning: The Advanced tab contains parameters that should only be
modified by advanced users.

Click on <OK> to save all of the current parameters as the new global
parameters.
Click on <Cancel> to discard all changes. All processing values are reset to
their values prior to entering this dialog box.
Process Parameters Category
The Process Parameters category contains the following fields:

Spectrum Survey

9-25

Chapter 9

Process Data
PDOP Cutoff .................... Specifies the maximum PDOP for an epoch; any
epochs with a PDOP above this value will not be
used in processing
Valid range of values is an integer of 1 to 100,
with a default of 10
Edit Multiplier .................Specifies the factor applied to the observation
standard deviations to compute the threshold for
outlier detection
Valid range of values is an integer of 1 to 10,
with a default of 3
Edit multiplier is displayed as a value with 1
decimal place

Note: using a value larger than the default will permit noisier data to be
used during processing. This may be necessary when processing with
data obtained from third party sources/receivers.

Tropospheric..................... Specifies which tropospheric model should

Model
be used while processing both vectors and
differential trajectories. Currently, the only model
choice is Hopfield
Single Pt ............................ Specifies what method of processing should
Solution Type
be used when computing single-point trajectory
and point solutions
This field affects how a points position is computed if you selected the
Compute Average Single-point Position check box in the Point Editor
dialog box (see Section 8.4.1, Point editor, Page 8-6). This field also specifies
how to process a single-point trajectory (that is, one without a base).
Currently, the only single-point processing choice is Pseudorange (Raw).
Differential ....................... Specifies what method of processing should
Solution Type
be used when computing differential vector and
trajectory solutions. The processing solution types
are shown in Table 2, Processing Solution
Types, Page 9-28

9-26

Spectrum Survey

Process Data

Chapter 9

Note: If an option is selected that is not feasible, Spectrum Survey uses

the next best option. It is recommended you use the default Automatic,
as that enables Spectrum Survey to process with the optimal solution
type. Also note that the Stratus receiver is capable of L1-only positioning,
while the Radian IS is both L1 and L2.

Compute............................ (Compute solutions using only L1 data) Forces

the software to use only L1 data when computing a
positioning solution, even if L2 GPS data is
available
Ignore.................................(Ignore all points when processing trajectories)
Causes all points connected to this rover to be
ignored, and the trajectory will be treated as purely
kinematic
Force ................................... (Force unreliable fixes to float [IT test]) Fixed
integer solutions that fail the IT reliability test will
be ignored, and a float solution will be used. In
other words, Spectrum Survey does not attempt to
fix solutions that are marginal. This option is
selected by default.

Spectrum Survey

9-27

Chapter 9

Process Data

Table 2: Processing Solution Types

Product
Solution Types

Characteristics
Stratus

Radian IS

Default

Uses the best possible method based on the data types available and the
distance between the base point and the remote/rover.

Raw Pseudoranges

Uses code measurements only; this is the fastest but least accurate algorithm.
Solutions not suitable if survey-level accuracy is required.

L1 fixed

Uses L1 carrier phase measurements (fixed ambiguities); recommended for use

with vectors <20 km

L1 float

Uses L1 carrier phase measurements (floating ambiguities)

L2 fixed

Uses L2 carrier phase measurements (fixed ambiguities). This can only be

performed by the L1/L2 version of Spectrum Survey, if the L2 carrier phase data
is available.

L3 fixed iono-free

Ionospheric-free solution uses L1 & L2 carrier phase measurements (fixed

ambiguities); recommended for use with vectors >20 km; extra noise is
unavoidable. This can only be performed by the L1/L2 version of Spectrum
Survey, if the L1/L2 carrier phase data is available.

L3 float iono-free

Ionospheric-free solution uses L1 & L2 carrier phase measurements (floating

ambiguities); recommended for use with vectors >50 km; extra noise is
unavoidable. This can only be performed by the L1/L2 version of Spectrum
Survey, if the L1/L2 carrier phase data is available.

L4 fixed widelane

Uses the L1-L2 widelane carrier phase combination (fixed ambiguities). This
can only be performed by the L1/L2 version of Spectrum Survey, if the L1/L2
carrier phase data is available.

Uses the L1+L2 narrowlane carrier phase combination (fixed ambiguities);

L5 fixed narrowlane recommended for use with vectors <20 km. This can only be performed by the
L1/L2 version of Spectrum Survey, if the L1/L2 carrier phase data is available.

A check mark () indicates that the solution type listed directly to the left of the check mark is available with that product.
However, those solution types available for Radian IS, that are not available for Stratus, require a hardware key.

9-28

Spectrum Survey

Process Data

Chapter 9
Standard Deviations Category
The Standard Deviations window enables you to edit standard deviation
settings for pseudorange, L1 carrier and L2 carrier measurements.

The Standard Deviations category contains the following fields:

Important: The Standard Deviations parameters should only be
modified by advanced users. It is highly recommended that processing
be performed using the default settings.
Pseudorange .................... Specifies the estimated standard deviation for the
pseudorange measurements in the processing
computations
Valid range of values is 0.1000 - 15.0000 (in
meters), with a default of 0.5000 m
Pseudorange standard deviation is displayed as
a value with 4 decimal places
L1 ....................................... Specifies the estimated standard deviation for the
L1 carrier measurements in the processing
computations
Valid range of values is 0.0010 - 0.0500 (in
meters), with a default of 0.0100 m
L1 standard deviation is displayed as a value
with 4 decimal places
Spectrum Survey

9-29

Chapter 9

Process Data
L2 ....................................... Specifies the estimated standard deviation for the
L2 carrier measurements in the processing
computations
Valid range of values is 0.0010 - 0.0500 (in
meters), with a default of 0.0125 m
L2 standard deviation is displayed as a value
with 4 decimal places
Process Interval Category
The Process Interval category contains the following fields.

Use Data Interval............. To specify that the processing should use the
smallest processing interval possible with the
given data
User ................................... To specify the processing interval directly. If you
specify an interval that is an impossible common
data interval, the program uses the closest
common data interval possible
Valid range of values is 1 - 900 (in seconds), with
a default of 1
Interpolate ........................ (Interpolate base data for trajectories) Should be
selected if you wish to use the data collected by the
base station in the calculation of trajectories, even
if the recording interval for the base is different
than the rover

9-30

Spectrum Survey

Process Data

9.3.7

Chapter 9

Select objects
If you do not wish that all objects be processed, you can de-select some (and
likewise can re-select some that you may have deselected). Selecting vectors
and/or trajectories may be done graphically via the plan view, or by means
of a dialog box by choosing either Select | Vector or Select | Trajectory from
the menu to open the Vector List and Trajectory List dialog boxes,
respectively.

9.3.7.1

Note: This section explains how to select data for processing; but,
because the same dialog boxes are used for selecting data for adjustment,
the Adjustment Settings information is also explained. For more
information on adjusting your data, See Chapter 12, Adjust a Network.

Select vector
The Vector List dialog box is accessed by choosing Select | Vector from the
menu, and is used to select specific vectors and vector occupation records.

The main window lists the available vectors, and individual vector
occupations, under the following six headings:
Vector .................................For vector records, the name of the vector appears
here, accompanied by a + or - sign, as
discussed in Section 8.6.1, Point selection, Page 8-23.
For occupation records (when a vector is
expanded), the 2-digit occupation number for the
vector occupation record appears here
Spectrum Survey

9-31

Chapter 9

Process Data
Start Time.......................... User-defined start time for processing
Duration ............................ Duration of time specified for processing
Status .................................Processing status. Unprocessed appears here if the
vector has not been processed
Weight................................ Displays the solution weight for the vector. The
weight indicates the amount of influence that will
be applied by each vector in a network, and can be
adjusted using the Solution Weight field. This
field can not be edited unless the vectors have been
processed
Exclude .............................. Displays No or Yes, depending on whether you
selected to exclude the vector from processing. No
means that you did not exclude it. The record is
excluded from adjustment if the Exclude from
Adjustment check box is selected. This field can
not be edited unless the vectors were processed
The following fields, found in the Adjustment Settings group, are not
available for editing until the vectors are processed, and a processed vector is
selected from the main window of the Vector List dialog box:
Solution............................. Enables you to set the weight for a vector
Weight
during adjustment
Valid range of values is 0.01 - 99.99, with a
default of 1.00
Solution weight is displayed as a value with 2
decimal places
Exclude from .................... Enables you to include or exclude vectors
Adjustment
from processing. If selected, the vectors Exclude
column will change to read Yes
The Vector List dialog box displays the following buttons:
<OK> ................................ To select the highlighted vector/occupation
records for processing, and to save all changes
<Cancel> .......................... To discard all changes

9-32

Spectrum Survey

Process Data

Chapter 9
<Expand All> .................. To expand all vector records to show their
respective vector occupation records
<Compress All> .............. To compress all vector occupation records, so that
only vector records are displayed

9.3.7.2

Select trajectory
The Trajectory Selection dialog box is accessed by choosing Select |
Trajectory from the main menu, and is used to select specific trajectory
records.

The main window displays all the trajectories available for selection. The
explanation of the fields in this dialog box is analogous to that for the Vector
List dialog box. See Section 9.3.7.1, Select vector, Page 9-31.
When a trajectory is selected, objects associated with the trajectory are also
selected. These include the trajectorys base point occupation, all point
occupations made during the course of the trajectory, and the rover
associated with the trajectory. A trajectory is considered selected if the check
box to the left of the record is selected. If a selected trajectory is deselected,
then the base point, rover, and trajectory point occupations associated with it
are also deselected unless they are also connected to other objects currently
selected for processing.

Spectrum Survey

9-33

Chapter 9

9.3.8

Process Data

Process
When you are satisfied with the way that your raw data has been configured,
select Tools | Process Data. Post-processing is then performed for all
selected vectors, trajectories, and points.
As different objects (for example, vectors, trajectories, points) are processed,
the plan view is updated. Assuming that your monitor supports 16 or more
colors, this results in a color change in the plan view for the object being
processed. Processing of the currently selected objects occurs in three
separate parts:

All point coordinates that are to be computed again from an average of

single-point positions are done first.

All selected vectors are processed according to their proximity to the

selected reference point.

All trajectories are processed

Progress is indicated by progress bars. If you click on <Cancel> during

processing, you are asked for confirmation. If you click on <No>, processing
resumes; otherwise, processing is cancelled and a message dialog box
indicating unsuccessful processing will appear.

Note: Vectors and trajectories will be generated using only points and
rovers that are currently selected (See Section 8.6, Select Raw Data for
Processing, Page 8-23).

A confirmation message is displayed when processing has been successfully

completed.
Several temporary files are generated during the course of a processing
session, and adequate disk space must be available for the creation of these
files. If there is not enough space to handle the current processing batch, an
error message is invoked and the entire processing session is aborted. Any
objects successfully processed before running out of disk space are kept, if
possible.

9-34

Spectrum Survey

Process Data

Chapter 9
The following table shows what each color means:

Table 3: Processing Colors

Item

Qualifier

Vector

Currently Processing

State

Light Magenta

Processed; Fixed Integer solution Selected

Light Green

Deselected

Light Yellow

solution

Deselected

Dark Yellow

Unprocessed

Selected

Light Red

Deselected

Dark Red

Selected

Light Blue

Deselected

Dark Blue

Currently processing

Light Magenta

Processed; Fixed Integer solution Selected

Deselected

Dark Green
Light Yellow

solution

Dark Yellow

Deselected
Selected

Light Red

Deselected

Dark Red

Selected

Light Green

Deselected

Dark Green

Currently processing
Processed
Unprocessed
Fixed as a reference

Spectrum Survey

Light Green

Processed; Float or Pseudorange Selected

Unprocessed
Point

Dark Green

Processed; Float or Pseudorange Selected

Fixed as a reference
Trajectory

Color

Light Magenta

Selected

Light Red

Deselected

Dark Red

Selected

Light Blue

Deselected

Dark Blue

Fixed as a reference by Spectrum Selected

Light Green

Survey

Dark Green

Deselected

9-35

Section 4 - Analyze and Troubleshoot Data

This section helps you to analyze your processed results, and illustrates the use of the loop closure
tool.
By the end of this section, you will be able to read the processing reports and use the information
to determine if your data processed successfully. If problematic data is found during processing,
you will also know how to use the Loop Closure tool to troubleshoot the data in your project.
Section 4 includes:

Analyze Process Results

Troubleshoot with Loop Closures

Chapter 10 Analyze Process Results

Upon completion of processing, a summary file is created for each vector and
trajectory, as well as an optional residuals file (if this was requested in the
Process Parameters dialog box). Also, an overall Process Summary is
created. You can save these summaries as files, or print them if desired. You
can examine these reports by selecting the Analysis category from the main
menu.

10.1 Process Summary

The Process Summary is a textual view summarizing what was processed in
either the last processing session (default) or in all your processing sessions
for the current project, depending on your choice in the drop down box in
the upper right corner of the screen.
Spectrum Survey 3.24
PROCESS SUMMARY
-------------------------------------------------------------------Project: C:\...\Common\Spectrum Projects\Project 20021016.spr
Coordinate System:
GEO [Geographic]
Datum: WGS84
Geoid Model:
<None>
Units: Meters
Processing Date:
2002/10/17 20:16:01.10 (UTC)
------------------------------------------------------------------VECTORS [6 total]
------------------------------------------------------------------ALL VECTORS ARE FIXED
Vector/Occ.
Solution Length
Used
Ratio
RMS
SD
------------------------------------------------------------------PT002-Tony
01
Fixed (L1) 106.875
97.65%
15.5
0.003
0.003
PT002-PT006
01
Fixed (L1) 60.602
99.76%
13.9
0.003
0.003
00850610-PT002
01
Fixed (L1) 52.352
97.09%
4.3
0.004
0.003
PT001-PT004
01
Fixed (L1) 109.683
88.26%
9.2
0.004
0.003
PT004-PT006
01
Fixed (L1) 152.281
86.55%
9.3
0.004
0.003
00850611-PT004
01
Fixed (L1)
132.129
86.49%
5.1
0.004

This output provides a header plus a single-line summary for each point,
vector, and trajectory that was processed. Although it appears automatically
as soon as processing is complete, it can also be accessed by selecting
Analysis | Process Summary from the menu.
Spectrum Survey

10-1

Chapter 10

Analyze Process Results

The Process Summary consists of four sections:
Header ............................... The header contains the software name and
version used to process the data, along with a
header title. It also contains the time and date of
processing, coordinate system, datum, units, and
geoid model.

Note: the Time Zone information does not appear if the time format is
GPS time.

Single-point Points ......... Lists each point that had an averaged position
computed, and a one-line summary of its results.
The single-point points section is omitted if no points are selected to have
their position re-computed by performing a weighted average. The section
contains each points name and its position in WGS84 geographical
coordinates. The height is the ellipsoidal height.
Vectors ............................... Lists each vector occupation that was processed,
and a one line summary of its results. As well, the
heading for the Vectors section displays the
number of fixed solutions out of the total number
of vectors that were processed. If all solutions were
fixed, the heading will display the message All
vectors are fixed.
The Vectors section is omitted if no vector occupations are selected to be
processed. The section has a heading to indicate the format of the vector
occupation information to follow.

10-2

Spectrum Survey

Analyze Process Results

Chapter 10

The vectors name is listed; then each occupation processed for this vector is
listed on a line containing the following:
Summary Heading

Description

Occ.

Occupation ID

Solution

Solution type as described in the Section 10.4.1, Vector summary, Page

10-14

Length

the computed length of the vector in meters

Obs. used

shows the percentage of observations used. Relative to the total

number of observations between the base and remote stations.

Ratio

the ratio of the obtained fixed-integer solution if a fixed solution was

obtained. The ratio is a comparison of the best and next-best solutions.
The higher the ratio, the more confident you can be about the results.
For example, values higher than 3 or 4 are desirable. For other vector
solution types, this field simply contains --.

RMS

the root-mean-square value associated with the quality of the solution

vector for the occupation.

SD

displays the standard deviation for the vector solution

If a vector occupation fails to be processed, the error is reported in place of

the solution information. The possible fatal errors include, but are not limited
to, this list:

Unable to open observation file <filename>

Corrupted observation file <filename>

Out of Memory, process halted

Write error, possible disk full

Unexpected data, process halted

Unable to create results file

If an occupation fails, the occupation ID and the status display, followed by

the error message. For more information about problems during processing,
see Section 10.4.1, Vector summary, Page 10-14.
Trajectories........................ Lists each processed trajectory, with a one line
summary of results. This section is omitted if no
trajectories are selected. The section has a heading
to indicate the format of the information to follow.

Spectrum Survey

10-3

Chapter 10

Analyze Process Results

Each trajectory processed is listed on a line containing the following:
Summary Heading

Description

Base[Occ]

Displays the base point name and its occupation ID. If the trajectory is
a single-point trajectory, the base point is reported as NONE

Rover

Displays the name associated with the rover

# epochs

The number of possible epochs that require a solution

# solved

The number of epochs for which a solution was obtained

# points

The number of point occupations (trajectory points) that were solved

while processing the trajectory

If a trajectory fails to be processed the error is reported in place of the

solution information. The possible fatal errors include but are not limited to
this list:

Unable to open obs file <filename>

Corrupted obs file <filename>

Out of Memory, process halted

Write error, possible disk full

Unexpected data, process halted

Unable to create points file

Unable to create trajectory file

You can save this summary as a file (select File | Save As) or print it (select
File | Print).

10.2 Raw Observations

The Raw Observations analysis enables you to create a graphical view of
either the number of satellites observed (versus time) or the identification of
those satellites observed (versus time).
The menus change after processing is complete (compare with those shown
under Section 3.1.1, Menu bar, Page 3-1).

10-4

Spectrum Survey

Analyze Process Results

Chapter 10

The menu structure when the Raw Observations analyze screen is active is
identical to the one shown in the Menus section (see Section 3.1.1, Menu bar,
Page 3-1), with the exception of the items under View and Window.
View

Window

Plan

Cascade

Number of Observed Satellites

Tile vertical

Observed Satellites

Tile horizontal

Options

Arrange icons

Status Bar

Close all

Toolbar

Minimize all
(open windows)

The following table shows the corresponding shortcut menu:

Number of Observed Satellites
Observed Satellites
Options
Print

With a Raw Observations analysis screen active, each view contains both a
set of playback controls, an observation file list and a point occupation list.
The playback controls include buttons for first, previous, next, and last (in
that order, left to right); these buttons can be used as a short cut to navigate
through the observation file list.
Button

Description
First - selects the first observation file in the list and updates the
Observation File list as well as the graphics window.
Previous - selects the file previous to the selected file in the Observation File
list and updates the list as well as the graphics window.
Next - selects the next file in the Observation File list and updates the list as
well as the graphics window.
Last - selects the last observation file in the list and updates the Observation
File list as well as the graphics window.

Spectrum Survey

10-5

Chapter 10

Analyze Process Results

If the first file in the observation file list is selected, the first and previous
buttons are disabled. If the last file in the observation file list is selected, the
last and next buttons are disabled.
The Rover list near the top of the screen contains the list of the observation
files that can be selected for analysis. All the observation files that exist in the
project are included in the list.
The Point Occ. list displays all the occupations for the selected point. By
default this list displays all point occupations; but you can narrow the view
to one by selecting an occupation from the list. If the selected rover file does
not contain any point occupations, this list will appear dimmed.

10.2.1

Number of observed satellites plot

Access the Number of Observed Satellites window by selecting Analysis |
Raw Observations | Number of Observed Satellites. This view is a vertical
bar chart with the number of satellites on the vertical axis, and the time of the
file represented on the horizontal axis.

This window displays the following:

10-6

Number of observed satellites as a function of time (the vertical scale

ranges from 0 to 12, and the horizontal time scale is formatted according
to the Tools | Options | Time settings)
Spectrum Survey

Analyze Process Results

Chapter 10

Observation data type (See Section 10.2.1.1, Raw analysis options, Page
10-7)

Elevation mask used in processing (See Section 10.2.1.1, Raw analysis

options, Page 10-7)

Time and date

Observation file used

If no ephemeris file could be found for an observation point, no elevation

angle can be applied; in that case, the header caption would read No
Ephemeris Data instead of Elevation Mask.
10.2.1.1

Raw analysis options

Access the Raw Analysis Options dialog box by selecting View | Options,
or by using the shortcut menu (right click) when over a Raw Observations
graphic window:

The following options are at the top of the Raw Analysis Options dialog box:

<Display L1 Carrier Data>

<Display L2 Carrier Data>

The status of these options determines what type of observation data is

displayed in the Raw Observation graphics. When each raw observation
graphic view is opened, the carrier type initially displayed for the plot
depends on the currently selected post-processing solution type (see Table 2,
Processing Solution Types, on Page 9-28). If it is Pseudorange, L1 fixed, or
L1 float then the graphic view opens with L1 carrier data displayed;
otherwise, L2 carrier data is displayed.

Spectrum Survey

Note: If an L1-only version of Spectrum Survey is being used, then only

L1 data may be analyzed.

10-7

Chapter 10

Analyze Process Results

Set the following options in the Raw Analysis Options dialog box:
<Display L2 ...................... To display only L2 observation data; if the
Carrier Data>
currently-selected file contains only L1 data, an
error message appears.
<Display L1 ...................... To display only L1 observation data; if the
Carrier Data>
currently selected file contains only L2 data, an
error message appears.
Elevation Mask ................Is used to limit the observation data displayed in
the Raw Observation graphic(s). Any observation
data collected from satellites that are beneath the
elevation angle provided will not be shown in the
graphic.
Valid range of values is 0 to 90, with a default
value of the currently specified mask angle (see
Basic Tab, Page 9-22)
Apply Settings To............ Contains the options All Raw Observation Views
and Current Raw Observation View. The selected
item determines the scope to which the Data Type
and Elevation Mask settings will be applied to
open raw observation views.
<OK> .................................Save any changes.
<Cancel> ........................... Discard any changes made to the graphic display
parameters.

10-8

Spectrum Survey

Analyze Process Results

10.2.2

Chapter 10

Observed satellites plot

The Observed Satellites screen can be accessed by selecting Analysis | Raw
Observations | Observed Satellites. This view is a horizontal bar chart with
each satellite observed represented as a horizontal bar spanning the time
during which the satellite was observed.

This view displays the following:

Spectrum Survey

Identification number of each satellite that was observed on the vertical

axis, and the time span of the current file on the horizontal axis
(formatted according to the Tools | Options | Time settings)

Observation data type that is displayed (See Section 10.2.1.1, Raw analysis
options, Page 10-7)

Elevation mask that is applied to the observations (See Section 10.2.1.1,

Raw analysis options, Page 10-7)

Time and date

Observation file used

Note: Only the satellites observed are present on the scale.

10-9

Chapter 10

Analyze Process Results

If no ephemeris file could be found for an observation point, then no
elevation angle can be applied, and the header caption of the Observed
Satellites screen will read No Ephemeris Data instead of Elevation Mask.
The following explains the difference in appearance or color of the bar
segments:
Colored bar ....................... Each observed satellite that was recorded in the
observation file is represented by one or more
horizontal bar segments spanning the time of
observation. Each bar segment represents a
continuous set of observations of a given satellite.
Black bar ........................... This bar represents a satellite that has an epoch
with a cycle-slip flag set.

Note: For L1/L2 data, a cycle slip is indicated if one or both frequencies
lose lock.

Broken bar ........................ A bar segment that is broken represents when the
receiver loses lock completely on a satellite, but
then reacquires that satellite again. This is
illustrated by the current bar segment closing at
the time the last data was collected, and then
beginning new at the time when the satellite is
reacquired.

Note: If an L1/L2 receiver loses lock on L2 but remains locked on L1, this
epoch is reported as if the cycle slip flag was set (but not as a complete
loss of lock).

10.3 Point List

Selecting Analysis | Point List from the menu creates a list of all the points
within the project, together with each points coordinates and time of
processing (if applicable).

10-10

Spectrum Survey

Analyze Process Results

Chapter 10

The menu structure when the Point List analysis screen is active is identical
to the one shown in the Menus section (See Section 3.1.1, Menu bar, Page 3-1),
with the exception of the items under View and Window.
View

Window

Plan

New Window

Status Bar

Cascade

Toolbar

Tile vertical
Tile horizontal
Arrange icons
Close all
Minimize all
(open windows)

A shortcut menu to save the list to a file, or print the list:

Save As
Print

It is possible to save this point data to an ASCII file. A portion of one is

shown below:
Spectrum Survey 3.24

POINT LIST

Project: C:\Sokkia\Common\Spectrum Projects\SiteA.SPR

[91g]
Coordinate System: GEO [Geographic]
Datum: NAD83
Geoid Model:
Fixed [2.000m]
Units: Meters
Time Format:
LOCAL
Time Zone: GMT-6.00h
POINTS
Process Date
Source
Control
-----------------------------------------------------------------Site1
2000/10/13 10:43:46.98 Vector (L1 Fixed) G
WGS84 (meters)
NAD83 (meters)
X:
653825.782
Lat: N
10 27 09.21162
Y: -6238885.556
Lon: W
84 01 02.37751
Z: 1149522.622
Hgt: 67.205
Orth: 65.205

The Point List display is made up of two sections, which are described as
follows:
Header ............................... Contains the software name and version used to
process the data, along with a header title. It also
contains the time format and the GMT offset
applied (if applicable).

Spectrum Survey

10-11

Chapter 10

Analyze Process Results

Point list ........................... A list of each point within the project along with its
coordinates. Each point within the project has a
line listing its name, the time and date of
processing, a Source Flag and a Control, followed
by several lines displaying its coordinates.
Summary Heading

Description

Source flag

Indicates the origin of the position: Field (from a

GPS receiver or data collector), Vector (computed
from vector), Single Pt. Average (through
single-point averaging), User (entered in the Point
Editor dialog box), Trajectory Point (from a static
occupation within a rover file), Adjustment (free)
and Adjustment (constrained)

Control

shows which type of control is associated with the

point; either G, H or V. G represents GPS, and
indicates that the point was used as a reference
during post-processing. H represents Horizontal
control point for adjustment, and V represents
Vertical. Both H and V are applied to data as a
control during adjustment. It is possible for data to
have all, some or one of these controls attached to
them. For example, GHV.

10.4 Processed Vectors

The items you can choose from the Analysis | Processed Vectors menu
enable you to view a textual summary of the vector processing results, a
graphical view of the vectors processing residuals or repeatability
information about processed vectors that contain multiple occupations. The
menu structure when a Vector Results analysis screen is active is identical to
that shown in the Menus section (See Section 3.1.1, Menu bar, Page 3-1), with
the exception of the items under View.
View
Plan
Vector Summary
Vector Residuals
Repeat Vector Summary
Displayed Satellites
Status Bar
Toolbar

10-12

Spectrum Survey

Analyze Process Results

Chapter 10

The Vector Results window has two shortcut menus, which are shown as
follows; the one on the left appears when you right-click over the Vector
Summary Results or the Repeat Vector Summary screens, and the one on
the right appears when you right-click over the Vector Residuals Results
screen.
Vector Summary

Vector Summary

Vector Residuals

Vector Residuals

Repeat Vector Summary

Repeat Vector Summary

Error Reporting Options

Displayed Satellites

Save As

Print

Print

For a description of the Error Reporting Options menu item, available when
you right-click over the Vector Summary Results, see Section 10.6, Error
Reporting Options, Page 10-28.
The control panel near the top of the window contains a set of playback
controls, a Vector Selection list, and a Filter list. The playback controls and
Vector Selection list are analogous to the user interface described in the Raw
Observations section (see Section 10.2, Raw Observations, Page 10-4). The
vectors within the project that are included in the list are based on the filter
selected from the Filter list.
The possible filter options are as follows:
Session Time .................... Lists all vectors that have results and are within the
current session time.
Last Processed .................. Lists only the files that were processed in the last
processing session regardless of the current session
time setting. This is the default setting.
All Processed.................... Lists all vectors in the current project that have
results.
Selected ............................. Lists only the vectors with results that are
currently selected.
If the residual view is selected and the selected vector does not have a
residual file, the display window displays the message No residual files were
found for this vector.

Spectrum Survey

10-13

Chapter 10

10.4.1

Analyze Process Results

Vector summary
The Vector Summary screen, accessed by selecting Analysis | Processed
Vectors | Vector Summary, is generated for each vector. It is possible to save
each summary to an ASCII file. A portion of one is shown following:
Spectrum Survey 3.24 VECTOR SUMMARY
VECTOR: Base-Site1
VECTOR OCCUPATION NO.: 01
Project: C:\Sokkia\Common\Spectrum Projects\SiteA.SPR
Coordinate System: GEO [Geographic]
Datum: NAD83
Geoid Model: Fixed [2.000m]
Units: Meters
Processing Date: 2000/10/13 10:43:43 (LOCAL)Time Zone: GMT-6.00h
Ephemeris: Broadcast
Clock Model: Broadcast
Elevation Mask: 15
BASE STATION (Base)
[C:\Sokkia\Common\Spectrum Projects\SiteA\Data\sa0301.obs]
-------------------------------------------------------------------Point Occupation:
01
Antenna Height: 1.583[Measured:1.531] Antenna Model:6100_Vert(meters)
Met. Measurements Used: Default
Dry Temp:
18.0 C
Humidity:
50 %
Pressure:
1013.25 mbar
WGS84 (meters)
NAD83 (meters)
X:
662589.253
Lat: N 10 28 25.81883
Y:
-6237529.884
Lon: W 83 56 11.12840
Z:
1151837.065
Hgt: 66.006
Orth: 64.006
REMOTE STATION (Site1)
[C:\Sokkia\Common\Spectrum Projects\SiteA\Data\masa.obs]
-------------------------------------------------------------------Point Occupation:
01
Antenna Height: 1.660[Measured:1.608]Antenna Model: 6100_Vert(meters)
Met. Measurements Used: Default
Dry Temp:
18.0 C
Humidity:
50 %
Pressure:
1013.25 mbar
WGS84 (meters)
NAD83 (meters)
X:
653825.782 +/- 0.008 Lat: N 10 27 09.21162 +/- 0.005
Y:
-6238885.556 +/- 0.016 Lon: W 84 01 02.37751 +/- 0.008
Z:
1149522.622 +/- 0.006 Hgt: 67.205 +/- 0.016 Orth: 65.205

VECTOR RESULTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------Solution Type: L1 fixed Processing Interval:
10.00 seconds
Time Span: 1998/07/30 10:19:40.00 to 1998/07/30 10:49:40.00 [30 min.]
Observations: 1138 Observations Used: 1099 [96.57%]Ratio:
4.2
WGS84 Vector (meters)
NAD83 (meters)
dx:
-8763.471
+/- 0.0081
Slope: 9164.765 +/- 0.008
dy:
-1355.672
+/- 0.0156
FwdAz: 255 07 30.76999
dz:
-2314.443
+/- 0.0058
BwdAz:
75 06 37.87800
FwdVA:
90 02 01.25071
RMS
0.012
BwdVA:
90 02 55.22344
dHgt:
1.199
COVARIANCE MATRIX
-------------------------------------------------------------------dx
dy
dz
dx
6.541148e-05
dy
-3.302496e-05
2.427206e-04

10-14

Spectrum Survey

Analyze Process Results

Chapter 10

The Vector Summary display is made up of six sections, which are described
below:
Header ............................... Tells how and when the vector was processed. It
contains the following:

Software name and version used to process the vector

Vector name and vector occupation number (ID)

Project filename and path

Date and time that the vector was processed

Time zone and GMT offset (if applicable)

Type of satellite ephemeris and clock corrections used

Units and Elevation mask

Coordinate system name and datum used to display the coordinates and
vector, and the geoid model applied to the coordinate system (if
applicable)

Base Station ...................... Describes the point used as the base in processing
the vector. It contains the following:

Spectrum Survey

Base point name and the point occupation used

Observation file and the data interval for the observation file associated
with the base points occupation

Computed antenna height is shown, along with the measured height and
antenna model

Position used for the base point. The number and format of the
coordinates used to describe the base point position depends on the
currently selected coordinate system. The position is shown in WGS84
Cartesian (XYZ) coordinates and geographical coordinates, with height
being displayed in meters above the ellipsoid. If the current coordinate
system is based on a datum other than WGS84, the point position is also
shown in geographic coordinates for this datum. In addition, if the
current coordinate system is a projection, the planar coordinates for the
point will also be shown

Meteorological information for the point: Dry Temp, Pressure, Humidity,

and the User/Default switch
10-15

Chapter 10

Analyze Process Results

Remote Station.................Describes the remote point used in processing the
vector. It contains information analogous to that in
the Base Station described previously.
Vector Results................... Describes the solution obtained for the processed
vector. The section contains the following:

Processing method used is displayed as one of the solution types shown

in Table 2, Processing Solution Types, Page 9-28

Data interval used in processing

Start and end time as well as the duration of the data processed

Number of observations that were available, and the number used in

processing

Percentage of observations used versus the number that exist

Vector is shown in multiple coordinate systems, depending on the

currently selected coordinate system. Each vector component displayed
shows its associated error, in sigma notation. The vector is always
displayed in WGS84 Cartesian elements (dX, dY, dZ) in meters. The
vector solution is also shown as a slope distance, azimuth, vertical angle,
and ellipsoidal height difference on the datum of the currently selected
coordinate system. The elements are shown in the units defined for the
coordinate system and the angles are shown in
degrees/minutes/seconds format. Plus, if the current coordinate system
is a projection, the vector is also displayed as the distance and azimuth
along the projection. The vector for the defined projection is shown in the
systems defined units

Ratio of the obtained fixed-integer solution is displayed (if applicable).

For other vector solution types, this field simply contains . The ratio
is a comparison of the best and next-best solutions. The higher the ratio,
the more confident you can be about the results (For example, values
higher than 3 or 4 are desirable)

Covariance ........................ Values contained in the covariance

Matrix
matrix for the processed vector solution. The
covariance is with respect to WGS84 Cartesian
elements X-X, X-Y, X-Z, Y-Y, Y-Z, Z-Z and has units
of meters squared.

10-16

Spectrum Survey

Analyze Process Results

Chapter 10

Warning ............................ Displays warning messages associated with any

warning flags returned from the program. Core
errors to be reported are set using the Error
Reporting Options dialog box (See Section 10.6,
Error Reporting Options, Page 10-28). If no warning
flags were set by the program, this section is
omitted. The warnings include, but are not limited
to, the following:

Missing precise ephemeris file

Precise ephemeris file corrupted

Missing satellite in ephemeris data

Missing time in ephemeris data

Used broadcast ephemeris when precise was requested

Unable to open residuals file

Error writing residuals file, possible disk full

Cycle slip message

Fixed integers failed IT reliability test at point 1:<satellite PRN numbers>

If a vector was attempted to be processed but failed, it is still listed as a

processed vector for viewing the results. The summary displays the header
section and then displays a message as to why the vector was not
successfully processed. The possible fatal errors include:

Spectrum Survey

Unable to open observation file <filename>

Corrupted observation file <filename>

Out of Memory, process halted

Write error, possible disk full

Unexpected data, process halted

Fixed integers failed IT reliability test:<satellite PRN numbers>

10-17

Chapter 10

Analyze Process Results

During post-processing, it is possible that warning messages may appear.
These messages are not fatal, and post-processing continues despite them.
The warnings include, but are not limited to, the following:

10.4.2

Initialization with user reference point <pointname> was performed at

<occupationtime>. Only a percentage of observations were used

Initialization with user reference point <pointname> was performed at

<occupationtime>. Only a float solution was achieved

Initialization was performed at point <pointname> when re-occupied at

<occupationtime>. Only a percentage of observations were used

Initialization was performed at point <pointname> when re-occupied at

<occupationtime>. Only a float solution was achieved

Initialization with user reference point <pointname> was performed at

<occupationtime>. Computed solution was <distance> from user
coordinate

Initialization was performed at point <pointname> when re-occupied at

<occupationtime>. Solution differs from previous occupation by
<distance>

Vector residuals
Residuals generated during GPS processing indicate the fit of the
computed vector solution with respect to the GPS observations collected in
your raw data files.

10-18

Spectrum Survey

Analyze Process Results

Chapter 10

If vector residuals were selected for generation (see Edit | Process

Parameters | Basic), the Vector Residuals display shows the satellite
double-difference residuals for each processed vector. The Vector Residuals
screen is accessed by selecting Analysis | Vector Results | Vector Residuals.

The Vector Residuals view displays the following:

Residual values for this vector as a function of time; the horizontal time
scale is formatted according to the Tools | Options | Time settings

Legend which relates the color used for a residual with the associated
PRN

Time and date

Vector name

By default, residuals for all satellites about which observations were

collected for the selected vector are displayed. Satellites can be deselected by
toggling their check boxes (See Section 10.4.2.1, Displayed satellites dialog box,
Page 10-19).
10.4.2.1

Displayed satellites dialog box

You can control which satellites are represented in the Residuals plot.

Spectrum Survey

10-19

Chapter 10

Analyze Process Results

The Displayed Satellites dialog box can be accessed, when the Residuals
screen is open, by selecting View | Displayed Satellites from the main
menu, or by selecting Displayed Satellites from the shortcut menu while
pointing at the Residuals screen.

The Displayed Satellites dialog box enables you to toggle the satellites that
are graphed in the Residuals screen. The check boxes each represent a
satellite that will be graphed in the residuals screen, and satellites that do not
exist in the residual file are disabled and unchecked. Note that this dialog
box controls display of the Residual screen only and will not affect
subsequent data processing.
On the right side of the Displayed Satellites dialog box are two command
buttons: <Select All> and <Select None>. Clicking <Select All> will select
all check boxes in that window, and clicking <Select None> will deselect all
check boxes in that window. By default, all check boxes are selected.
Click <OK> to submit your choices, or <Cancel> to discard changes.

10.4.3

Repeat vector summary

The Repeat Vector Summary report is accessed by selecting
Analysis | Processed Vectors | Repeat Vector Summary from the menu.
This report displays information pertaining to all processed vectors in the
current project that contain multiple occupations. The information includes:

10-20

Vector name

Occupation number

Slope distance

Vector component lengths

Spectrum Survey

Analyze Process Results

Chapter 10

The slope distance and vector component data are displayed in the current
coordinate system for the project (either dX/dY/dZ or dE/dN/dH).
Most importantly, you can use the Repeat Vector Summary report to see the
length difference between solved occupations of the same vector. This can be
a useful tool for blunder detection.

10.5 Processed Trajectories

The Trajectory Results analysis enables you to either view a text summary of
the results or create a graphical view of the trajectorys residuals. The menu
structure when the Trajectory Results analysis screen is active is identical to
the one shown in the Menus section (See Section 3.1.1, Menu bar, Page 3-1),
with the exception of the items under View and Window.
The View | Displayed Satellites menu item is available only if trajectory
residuals view is active.
View

Window

Plan

Cascade

Trajectory Summary

Tile vertical

Trajectory Residuals

Tile horizontal

Displayed Satellites

Arrange icons

Status Bar

Close all

Toolbar

Minimize all
(open windows)

The Trajectory Results windows have two shortcut menus, which are shown
as follows; the one on the left appears when you right-click over the
Trajectory Results Summary, and the one on the right appears when you
right-click over the Trajectory Results Residuals screen.
Trajectory Summary

Trajectory Summary

Trajectory Residuals

Trajectory Residuals

Error Reporting Options

Displayed Satellites

Save As

Print

Print

For a description of the Error Reporting Options menu item, available when
you right-click over the Trajectory Summary Results, see Section 10.6, Error
Reporting Options, Page 10-28.

Spectrum Survey

10-21

Chapter 10

Analyze Process Results

If the active view is a Trajectory Results screen, the status bar contains two
fields:

The mode you are in (Processing Mode or Adjustment Mode)

Content determined by the filter at the top of each screen

An example of this status bar is shown here:

Processing Mode

3 Trajectories

The view is composed of two parts: a control panel and a display window.
The control panel is the same for either viewing option and contains a set of
playback controls, a Trajectory Selection list, and a Filter list. The playback
controls and Trajectory Selection list are analogous to the user interface
described in the Raw Observations section (See Section 10.2, Raw
Observations, Page 10-4).
The trajectories within the project that are included in the list are based on
the filter selected from the Filter list. The possible filter options are as
follows:
Session Time .................... Lists all trajectories that have results and are
within the current session time
Last Processed .................. Lists only the files processed in the last processing
session regardless of the current session time
setting. This is the default setting
All Processed.................... Lists all trajectories in the current project that have
results
Selected ............................. Lists only the trajectories with results that are
currently selected
If the residual view is selected and the selected trajectory does not have a
residual file, the display window displays the message No residual files were
found for this trajectory.

10-22

Spectrum Survey

Analyze Process Results

10.5.1

Chapter 10

Trajectory summary
This screen is accessed by selecting Analysis | Processed Trajectories |
Trajectory Summary. A summary is generated for each trajectory that has
been processed. It is possible to save each summary to an ASCII file. A
portion of one is shown below.
Spectrum Survey 3.24
TRAJECTORY SUMMARY
TRAJECTORY: BASE-TONY
-------------------------------------------------------------------Project:
C:\Sokkia\Common\Spectrum Projects\SiteA.spr
Coordinate System: NZGRID [New Zealand Map Grid]
Datum: NZGD49
Geoid Model:
Fixed [2.000m]
Units: Meters
Processing Date:
Ephemeris:
Elevation Mask:

2000/11/15 16:37:59 (LOCAL) Time Zone:GMT+0.00h

Broadcast
Clock Model:Broadcast
15

BASE STATION(BASE)[C:\...\Spectrum Projects\SiteA\Data\base.pdc]

-------------------------------------------------------------------Point Occupation: 01
Antenna Height:3.086[Measured:1.586] Antenna Model: 6100_vert(meters)
Met. Measurements Used: Default
Dry Temp:
18.0 C
Humidity: 50 %
Pressure:
1013.25 mbar
WGS84 (meters)
NZGD49 (meters)
X:
-2512784.344
Lat: N 33 51 17.29331
Y:
-4669075.144
Lon: W118 17 13.81865
Z:
3532828.173
Hgt: -268.697
Orth: -270.697
NZGRID (meters)
E:
-285336822821.591
N:
-40879055981.159
ROVER (TONY) [C:\...\Spectrum Projects\SiteA\Data\Tony.pdc]
-------------------------------------------------------------------Antenna Height: 2.147[Measured:2.147]Antenna Model:
<None> (meters)
TRAJECTORY RESULTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------Processing Interval:
1.00 second
Time Span:
1999/03/02 22:23:35.00 to 1999/03/02 22:49:15.00
[25 min.]
Number Epochs Observed: 1541
Number Epochs Used: 1473
[95.59%]
POINT LIST
-------------------------------------------------------------------PT006
(01)
Solution Type: L5 fixed narrowlane
Time Span: 1999/03/02 22:28:25 to
1999/03/02 22:28:33
[0 min.]
Antenna Model: <None> (meters) Ant.Hgt: 2.000 [Measured: 2.000]
Observations: 54 Observations Used: 54 [100.00%]

Spectrum Survey

10-23

Chapter 10

Analyze Process Results

WGS84 (meters)
X:
-2512779.250
0.010
Y:
-4669031.054
0.006
Z:
3532888.984
0.026

NZGD49 (meters)
Lat: N 33 51 19.67801

+/-

0.010

+/-

0.017

Lon:

+/-

0.021

Hgt:

W118 17 14.45693
-269.067

+/+/+/-

Orth: -271.067
NZGRID (meters)
E:
-285371118973.893
N:
-40980960627.702

+/-

WGS84 Vector (meters)

dx:
5.095
0.010
dy:
44.090
dz:
60.811
RMS

+/+/-

0.006
0.010

+/- 0.0100
+/- 0.0167
+/- 0.0213

0.003

NZGRID (meters)
Grid Distance:
Grid Azimuth:

NZGD49 (meters)
Slope:
FwdAz:
BwdAz:
FwdVA:
BwdVA:
dHgt:

347
167
90
89

24
24
16
43

75.285
42.32745
41.97186
52.78953
09.65337
-0.369

107521081.885
198 36 02.63595

WARNINGS
------------------------------------------------------------------WARNING: [999 253547.000] Epoch rejected. Remote PDOP exceeds
specified maximum: 11.6.
WARNING: Percent of remote epochs rejected due to high PDOP: 0.3%.
WARNING: Percent of epochs with L2 cycle slips on PRN 7: 4.8%.

The Trajectory Summary display is made up of six sections, which are

described as follows. If the trajectory was attempted to be processed but
failed, it is still listed as a processed trajectory for viewing the results; its
summary displays the header section and a message explaining why the
trajectory was not successfully processed.
Header .............................. Describes how and when the trajectory was
processed. It contains the following:

10-24

Software name and version used to process the data, along with a header
title

Trajectory name

Project filename and path

Date and time that the trajectory was processed, including the time zone
(if applicable)

Spectrum Survey

Analyze Process Results

Chapter 10

Type of satellite ephemeris used

Geoid model

Units

Elevation mask

Clock model

Coordinate system name and datum used to display the coordinates

Base Station ..................... Describes the point used as the base in processing
the trajectory. It contains the following:

Point name and observation file

Point occupation and antenna height are shown

Measurement interval of the data

Point occupations associated antenna model, and its height

Meteorological measurements

Position used for the base point. The number and format of the
coordinates used to describe the base point position depends on the
currently selected coordinate system. The position is shown in WGS84
Cartesian (XYZ) coordinates and geographical coordinates, with height
being displayed in meters above the ellipsoid. If the current coordinate
system is based on a datum other than WGS84, the point position is also
shown in geographic coordinates for this datum. In addition, if the
current coordinate system is a projection, the planar coordinates for the
point will also be shown

Rover .................................Describes the rover used in processing the

trajectory. It contains the following:

Spectrum Survey

Rover name

Observation file

Rovers antenna height

Measurement interval of the data

Rovers associated antenna model

10-25

Chapter 10

Analyze Process Results

Trajectory .......................... Gives a brief summary of the processed
Results
trajectory. It contains the following:

Data interval u.sed in processing

Process interval, shown in seconds

Start and end time, together with the duration of the data processed

Number of epochs observed, and the number successfully processed

Percentage of processed epochs versus the number that were observed

Point list ........................... Only present if the rover occupied any points that
were also selected for processing. If no point
occupations were processed, not even the header is
shown for this section. For each point, the
following are displayed:

Point name

Occupation number

Solution type

Data interval used in processing

Point occupations associated antenna model, and its height

Number of epochs observed, and the number successfully processed

Percentage of processed epochs versus the number that were observed

The computed position is displayed in WGS84 Cartesian (XYZ)

coordinates and geographical coordinates, with height being displayed
in meters above the ellipsoid. If the current coordinate system is based
on a datum other than WGS84, the point position is also shown in
geographic coordinates for this datum. If the current coordinate system
is a projection, the planar coordinates for the point will also be shown.
The error (in sigma format) for each coordinate element is displayed in
the same units as were used in defining the coordinate.

Warnings .......................... Displays warning messages associated with any

warning flags returned from the program. If the
program set no warning flags, this section is
omitted. For a list of possible warnings, see Page
10-17.
10-26

Spectrum Survey

Analyze Process Results

10.5.2

Chapter 10

Trajectory residuals
If trajectory residuals were selected for generation (by selecting Edit |
Process Parameters | Basic), the Trajectory Residuals display graphs the
satellite double-difference residuals for each processed trajectory. This screen
is accessed by selecting Analysis | Processed Trajectories | Trajectory
Residuals.

The Trajectory Residuals view displays the following:

Residual values for this trajectory as a function of time; the horizontal

time scale is formatted according to the Tools | Options | Time settings

Legend which relates the color used for a residual with the associated
PRN.

Time and date

Trajectory name

By default, residuals for all satellites about which observations were

collected for the selected trajectory are displayed. Satellites can be deselected
by toggling their check boxes (See Section 10.4.2.1, Displayed satellites dialog
box, Page 10-19). Each Residual Graphics view has an independent satellite
filter.

Spectrum Survey

10-27

Chapter 10

Analyze Process Results

10.6 Error Reporting Options

The Error Reporting dialog box, available on the Vector Summary and
Trajectory Summary shortcut menus, has three tabbed windows: Single
Point, Differential and Ephemeris.

Use the Error Reporting dialog box to control which errors and warnings,
logged during processing, are displayed in the Vector Summary or Trajectory
Summary. Any errors that are flagged for detection will be reported at the
end of the Vector Summary (See Section 10.4.1, Vector summary, Page 10-14) or
Trajectory Summary (See Section 10.5.1, Trajectory summary, Page 10-23).
A check mark in a check box to the left of an option means that the option is
selected, and any errors generated, that can be defined by that option, will be
logged. By default, all error messages are selected (flagged) to be reported.
The Error Reporting dialog box includes the following four buttons along the
bottom of the dialog box:
<Select All> ..................... Click in any tabbed window to select all options in
that window. You must click <Select All> in each
tabbed window if you want every possible
warning to be reported.
<Select None> .................. Click in any tabbed window to deselect all options
in that window. You must click <Select None> in
each tabbed window if you want none of the
possible warnings to be reported.

10-28

Spectrum Survey

Analyze Process Results

10.6.1

Chapter 10

Single point
The Single Point tabbed window reports errors for both remote and base
receivers. This window has two sections: Epochs Rejected Due To and
Percent of Epochs Rejected Due To.

The Epochs Rejected Due To reports each epoch rejected for a particular
reason, and the Percent of Epochs Rejected Due To warns of the percentage
of epochs rejected due to a particular reason. Both sections will report for the
following:

10.6.2

Insufficient satellites

Bad geometry

High RMS

Differential
The Differential tabbed window reports differential processing errors. This
window has three sections: Insufficient Satellites, Cycle Slips on L1 and/or
L2 Reported for Each Satellite, and Other Errors.

Spectrum Survey

10-29

Chapter 10

Analyze Process Results

The Insufficient Satellites section enables you to select warnings for:

Epochs rejected

Percent of epochs rejected.

The Cycle Slips for Each Satellite section enables you to select warnings for:

Cycle slips detected

Percentage of epochs with cycle slips detected.

The Other Errors section lists three warnings:

10.6.3

Percentage of epochs where no base satellite was found for double

differencing

Percentage of epochs each satellite spent below the mask angle

L2 processing requested by the user, but is not available.

Ephemeris
The Ephemeris tab reports ephemeris errors and has one section labeled
Percentage of Epochs That The Computation Failed For.

The Percentage of Epochs That The Computation Failed For section

contains the following warning types:

10-30

Broadcast ephemeris position

Broadcast ephemeris clock

Precise ephemeris position

Precise orbit clock

Spectrum Survey

Chapter 11 Troubleshoot With Loop Closures

A loop closure is a method for pin-pointing vectors with errors. The loop is
created by selecting several vectors that create a closed geometrical form.
Spectrum Survey tests the loop for closure error.
Loop closure calculations assist in detecting errors in your processed data.
Use loop closures as a means of blunder detection before including the
vectors in a network adjustment.
Select three or more vectors that create a closed form. When the loop closure
is calculated, Spectrum Survey automatically generates a loop closure report
in the main project window. Permissible values for the loop closure error are
determined by the specifications of the project.
Loop closures are used after processing and before adjustment iterations to
check the quality of the processed vectors included in the network. Loop
closure analysis can only be performed on vector data that has previously
been processed.

Spectrum Survey

Note: Loop closure analysis is unable to detect antenna height

measurement blunders.

11-1

Chapter 11

Troubleshoot With Loop Closures

11.1 Perform Loop Closures

To perform loop closures, follow these steps:
1.

11-2

Access the Loop Mode by choosing Analysis | Loop Closure from the
main menu. The Processing Plan View and the Loop View windows
appear automatically.

Note: The coordinate system columns in the Loop View window will
display E, N, Hgt, when the coordinate system is map projection and X,
Y, Z (ECEF), when the coordinate system is geographic.

Spectrum Survey

Troubleshoot With Loop Closures

Spectrum Survey

Chapter 11

2.

When the Loop View is active, the cursor displays as a pointing hand. If
this does not happen, right click over the Plan View window and choose
Select (Loop) from the shortcut menu. Click on a vector in the Plan View
to begin your loop definition. The chosen vector will turn purple and
vector information will appear in the Loop View window.

3.

Select subsequent vectors you want for your loop. As you select vectors,
they too will display in purple. To de-select the vectors, right click over
the Plan View and choose Cancel Loop from the shortcut menu. The
vectors will return to their original color.

11-3

Chapter 11

Troubleshoot With Loop Closures

4.

Continue selecting vectors until you have defined a closed form. If you
select a vector that has multiple occupations, all occupations will be
displayed in the Plan View window, and you must select the one you
want to use for your loop. Once a loop has been completed, the Plan
View cursor will return to normal.

Note: A closed form must be defined before loop selection is complete.

5.

The Loop View table populates as you select vectors from the Plan View.

You can create as many loops as you desire, and additional loops will be
displayed after the initial loop in the Loop View window.
Loop information (as displayed in the Loop View window) can be saved or
printed by right-clicking over the Loop View window and selecting the print
or save option from the shortcut menu (see Section 11.2.1, Print/save loop
report, Page 11-6). As well you can delete loops you previously created.

11-4

Spectrum Survey

Troubleshoot With Loop Closures

Chapter 11

To leave the Loop Mode and return to the window that was open prior to
entering Loop Mode, right click on the Plan View and select Exit Loop
Closure from the shortcut menu or simply close the X in the top right corner
of the Loop View window.

11.2 Interpret the Table

The Loop View table gives you specific information about the performed
loop closure and the loops associated vectors. Examine the table values
associated with the loop closure calculations to identify observational errors
that may corrupt your network. The Loop View table displays the following
information from left to right:
Loop Name ................By default, the loop name will increment by one for
each new loop. You can rename a loop by double
clicking on its entry in the table
Segments....................Vectors that comprise the loop
Occ...............................Occupation number of the segment
Start Time...................Start time of the vector occupation using the current
time format of the project
Solution......................Processed solution type of the vector occupation
Total Length...............Total length of the loop
E, N, Hgt..............(or X, Y, Z) These delta values indicate the amount
of misclosure for each component. Ideally, these values
would equal zero, indicating that there was no error
present. The larger the closure value the more error
that is present
Len ............................Indicates the length misclosure (all components
combined) of the loop. This provides a precision value
for the entire loop
ppm .............................Distance proportional accuracy measure. The relative
precision of the entire loop based on the total length
(ppm = parts per million)
Ratio............................Displays the ratio of misclosure for the loop based on
the total length of the loop
Spectrum Survey

11-5

Chapter 11

11.2.1

Troubleshoot With Loop Closures

Print/save loop report

If you require a loop report, click anywhere on the table window and select
Print Loop Report or Save Loop Report from the shortcut menu.

Depending which you choose, the report will print to your default printer, or
save to your PC in the Results folder of your project directory.
The loop report gives you specific information about the performed loop
closure and the loops associated vectors. You can examine the values
associated with the loop closure report to identify observational errors that
may corrupt your network.
The following is an example of a loop closure report:

Spectrum Survey 3.24

Loop Summary

Project Name:
C:\Sokkia\Common\Spectrum Projects\SiteA.spr
Coordinate System: UTM [Universal Transverse ...] Datum: NAD83
Units: meters
Geoid Model:
Fixed
Date:
2000/11/21 20:56:19 (LOCAL)
Time Zone:GMT+0.00h
-------------------------------------------------------------------Loop Name:
Loop3
-------------------------------------------------------------------From To
Occ Soln
Slope
dE
dN
dHgt
-------------------------------------------------------------------Site2 Base
Site1 Base
Site1 Site2

01
01
01

Total Segments:
Total Length:
Precision:

11-6

L3Fix
10582.773
3418.119
10015.238
80.931
L3Flt
17089.501 -16928.634
2338.655
55.573
L3Fix
21747.659 -20347.088
-7678.299
20.550
---------------------------------------------Closure 0.101
0.018
-0.010
-0.099
3
49428.839
1/488792 (= 2.05 PPM)

Spectrum Survey

Troubleshoot With Loop Closures

Chapter 11

The loop closure report displays the following information from top to
bottom:

The project name, coordinate system, geoid model, date and time that
the loop closure was performed

A description of the vectors that comprise the loop, including the vector
ID, the type of solution obtained, the slope distance and the vector
coordinates

The closure values

A loop summary, and the precision value obtained by the closure

The closure values, listed below the three vector components of the loop,
indicate the amount of adjustment necessary for each vector to
mathematically close the loop. Ideally, these values would all equal zero;
indicating that there was no error present. The larger the closure value the
more error that might be present.
The precision value indicates the relative precision of the composite closure
error into the total distance of the loop. This provides a mean precision value
for the entire loop.

Spectrum Survey

11-7

Section 5 - Adjust and Export Data

This section shows how to adjust, analyze, and export your data.
By the end of this section, you will know how to adjust your processed data, and you will be able
to read the adjustment report and use the information to determine if the adjusted data meets your
needs.
This section also explains how to export your data in several formats.
Section 5 includes:

Adjust a Network

Analyze Adjustment Results

Export your Results

Chapter 12 Adjust a Network

When performing your survey, errors may be present in your measured
observations. Spectrum Survey will enable you to perform a network
adjustment to estimate unknown quantities (such as coordinates of unknown
points), and help to detect errors and blunders in your observations so that
you can correct them.

12.1 Work with a Network

Once you have set project settings, imported your files (see Chapter 5, Create
a Project), and processed your data (see Chapter 9, Process Data), your
network is ready for adjustment.
Adjusting a network is typically an iterative (repetitive) process. At any time
during your project you can perform adjustments, change network settings,
edit point and vector data, and even import more data into the network.
Spectrum Survey enables you to work with a network by:

Setting adjustment parameters (see Section 12.3.4, Apply adjustment

settings, Page 12-6, and Section 12.3.5, Apply weight settings, Page 12-12)

Importing additional data files (see Chapter 6, Import Data Into a Project)

Using the Point Editor and Vector Editor (see Section 8.4.1, Point editor,
Page 8-6, and Section 9.3.2, Edit vectors, Page 9-6)

Calculating network adjustments (see Section 12.4, Calculate the Network

Adjustment, Page 12-14)

Exporting adjustment results (see Chapter 14, Export Results)

12.2 Steps to Adjust a Network

Spectrum Survey enables you to decide the appropriate sequence of events
while adjusting your network. You can select your data, perform any loop
closures, check for suspect vectors, or apply new adjustment parameters at
any time during the adjustment process.
Spectrum Survey

12-1

Chapter 12

Adjust a Network

Note: For information on performing loop closures see Chapter 11,

Troubleshoot With Loop Closures.

Processed data must be selected to be adjusted. See Section 9.3.7, Select

objects, Page 9-31, for more information.
Networks must have a least one horizontal and one vertical coordinate fixed.
The fixed coordinates may belong to the same point, or you can choose to fix
different points (For Example, pointA fixed horizontally and pointB fixed
vertically). Adjustment parameters can be applied at any time before or
during the adjustment iterations.
You may check the integrity of observed values by performing a minimally
constrained adjustment. Also, you can correct detected blunders using the
techniques explained in Section 13.3.2, Residuals reports, Page 13-17.
Warning: If your network contains extreme blunders, additional field
observations may be required.
After observational blunders have been corrected, you can execute a
constrained network adjustment with all known points fixed to determine
the final coordinates of the unknown points. If inconsistencies exist between
the coordinates of multiple known points, the observed residuals will
increase slightly. Also, you may notice poor results due to errors in known
point coordinates.

12.2.1

Note: For more information on designating a fixed point, minimally

constrained adjustments, and constrained adjustments, see Section
12.3.2, Fix a point, Page 12-5.

Running the adjustment

To begin an adjustment, select Full Adjustment, Coordinates Only, or Check
Only from the Tools | Run Adjustment menu option.

12-2

Spectrum Survey

Adjust a Network

Chapter 12
Before the data is adjusted, Spectrum Survey will try to eliminate gross errors
and blunders. A logical check on your network is performed to identify any
discrepancies within the input data and verify that points are within
tolerance limits. If all checks are successful, Spectrum Survey will then
perform its statistical calculations and produces the results for a network
adjustment.
Upon completing a network adjustment iteration, Spectrum Survey
generates two reports detailing the results of these calculations: Residuals
and Adjustment. The Residuals report lists residual data for the most recent
adjustment, and the Adjustment report provides a comprehensive
description of all information pertaining to the network adjustment.

Note: For more information on viewing and interpreting the reports

generated by a network adjustment, see Section 13.3, Network Adjustment
Reports, Page 13-4.

The Adjustment report (generated by selecting Full Adjustment or

Coordinates Only) is displayed in the Network Adjustment Report window
and contains the following:
Section

Spectrum Survey

Seen In Report Type

Input coordinates and misclosures

Full Adjustment & Coordinates Only

Adjustment parameters

Full Adjustment & Coordinates Only

Adjustment statistics

Full Adjustment & Coordinates Only

Adjusted coordinates with error ellipses

Full Adjustment & Coordinates Only

Residuals

Full Adjustment & Coordinates Only

Internal and external reliability

Full Adjustment

Relative precision

Full Adjustment

12-3

Chapter 12

Adjust a Network

Note: If you selected Check Only, an Error report, not an Adjustment

report, will be generated. The Error report will not have any of the
sections found in the Adjustment report. The Error report alerts you to
errors within your data network.

You can use the Adjustment report to help identify possible network
problems or deficiencies and to plan future network adjustment iterations. If
you wish to save the report for future analysis, select File | Save As from the
main menu.
Additionally, the Plan View is updated to reflect the results of the
adjustment. For more information on the Plan View, see Section 3.2, Plan
View, Page 3-6.

12.3 Before Adjusting your Data

Before performing the adjustment, you can edit your data in Spectrum
Survey. Many of these steps may have been performed in previous chapters,
but if not, they can be performed now, if necessary, and in any order.

12.3.1

Select data - required (Page 12-4)

Designate a fixed point - required (Page 12-5)

Change regional settings (Page 12-6)

Apply adjustment settings (Page 12-6)

Apply weight settings (Page 12-12)

Review point and vector data (Page 12-14)

Review the Plan View (Page 12-14)

Select data
For vectors and trajectory points to be adjusted, they must first be selected.
Using the Vector List and Trajectory List dialog boxes, you can select the
vectors (with specific vector occupations), and trajectories (with specific
trajectory points) for adjustment. For more information, see Section 9.3.7,
Select objects, Page 9-31.

12-4

Spectrum Survey

Adjust a Network

12.3.2

Chapter 12

Fix a point
Use the Point Editor dialog box to fix a point. For each point, you can fix the
horizontal and/or the vertical values. This separation of values enables you
to use different points to fix the three dimensions used in the control for the
initial network adjustment.
Designating a fixed point provides control for all network adjustments. You
can designate a fixed point at any time when manipulating a network;
however, you must at least fix one three-dimensional point or two points
(one vertically and one horizontally) before performing any adjustments. If
you forget to fix your points prior to adjustment, you will be prompted
whether you want the software to fix the points automatically.

Note: Fixing three dimensions involves fixing latitude, longitude and

elevation. You can fix an elevation separate from horizontal values.

For information on designating a fixed point using the Point Editor dialog
box, see Section 8.4.1.2, Point information tab, on Page 8-10.
You can perform both minimally constrained adjustments (free) and
constrained adjustments. For information on each type of adjustment and
the specific fixed point requirements see the following sections:
Minimally constrained adjustment
When you fix only one point in three dimensions (or one point fixed
horizontal and one point fixed vertical) Spectrum Survey performs a
minimally constrained adjustment. Fixing just one point enables
contradictions between observed values to be obtained as residuals, without
including errors between coordinates of two or more known points in the
calculation. This type of adjustment is useful in detecting blunders in
observed values and determining the measured accuracy of the network.
Constrained network adjustment
When you fix more than one point in a network, Spectrum Survey performs a
constrained network adjustment. After blunders have been excluded using a
minimally constrained adjustment, this method performs a network
Spectrum Survey

12-5

Chapter 12

Adjust a Network
adjustment treating all known project points as fixed points. A constrained
network adjustment determines the coordinates of unknown points while
maintaining consistency with the coordinates of existing known points.
Sometimes additional parameters are included as unknowns.
When fixing points for a constrained network adjustment, pay attention to
the accuracy of the coordinates and uniformly locate a sufficient number of
fixed points at the periphery of the network, preferably located in three of the
four quadrants of the network. Also, be sure to evaluate the estimated values
(for example, by comparing free adjustment results to published values).

12.3.3

Change regional settings

You can specify datums, coordinate systems and geoid models in the
Coordinate System Selection dialog box. Geoid models control the height
transformation calculations Spectrum Survey makes when reducing
ellipsoidal heights to orthometric heights. For more information, refer to the
How To Define Map Projections, Ellipsoids and Datums section in the
Spectrum Survey Advanced Reference Materials (see Section 1.10, Additional
Resources, on Page 1-8).

12.3.4

Apply adjustment settings

The Network Adjustment Parameters dialog box helps you set tolerances
and adjustment criteria for adjustments. You can change several parameters
in Spectrum Survey that affect how adjustment calculations are performed,
and you can set parameters for network adjustment calculations.

12-6

Spectrum Survey

Adjust a Network

Chapter 12
Steps to define Network Adjustment Parameters

Spectrum Survey

1.

From the main menu, select Edit | Adjustment Parameters to open the
Network Adjustment Parameters dialog box.

2.

Select either the General (see Section 12.3.4.1, General tab, Page 12-8) or
Options (see Section 12.3.4.2, Options tab, Page 12-11) tab at the upper
right of the dialog box to change respective settings.

3.

Set values appropriate to your project specifications.

4.

Select <OK> to apply the settings to the current project. To apply these
changes to your network, a new adjustment iteration must be performed.

12-7

Chapter 12
12.3.4.1

Adjust a Network
General tab
The General tab enables you to set parameters that control the weighting
used with observations and the thresholds for adjustment error reporting.
Within the General tab you can set desired network accuracy, confidence
levels, convergence levels and criteria, the standard weight settings and the
weighting method for the adjustment.

Desired network.............. You can set the desired project accuracy by

accuracy
entering values in the Horizontal and Vertical
fields
Valid range of values for the Horizontal field is
0.000 to 100.000 (in meters), with a default of
0.010 and 0 to 1000 (ppm), with a default of 1
Valid range of values for the Vertical field is
0.000 to 200.000 (in meters), with a default of
0.020 and 0 to 1000 (ppm), with a default of 1

Note: Adjustment data that does not meet the criteria specified here will
be flagged in your network adjustment report.

Confidence level.............. Choose the 99% Error option or the 95% Error
option for the level of confidence required for your
project

12-8

Spectrum Survey

Adjust a Network

Chapter 12
Convergence..................... Spectrum Survey enables you to apply
convergence criteria for the adjustment. The Max.
Iterations field limits the number of iterations
performed during the adjustment and the
Convergence Limits field indicates the tolerance
limit of convergence. Both fields determine when
Spectrum Survey should end the adjustment
process
Default values for the Max. Iterations field is 1
to 32767, with a default of 5
Valid range of values for the Convergence Limit
field is 0.0001 to 0.0009 (in meters), with a
default of 0.0001

Note: If the adjustment could not converge by the set iteration value, a
system message is displayed and the network adjustment is canceled. A
probable cause for the failure is that the approximate coordinates or
observed values were defective.

Standard weight .............. Weight settings allow you to determine the

settings
amount of influence each vector has on the
adjustment process.
You can specify particular weight settings in the Standard Weight settings
group. Enter a weight value in the mm field followed by a distance
proportional weight setting in the ppm field for each axis:

dX - specifies weight settings for the x axis

dY - specifies weight settings for the y axis

dZ - specifies weight settings for the z axis

After establishing new Standard Weight settings, choose the appropriate

selection from the Weighting Method settings group as described in the next
section.

Spectrum Survey

12-9

Chapter 12

Adjust a Network
Weighting Method .......... This option assigns a weighting scale to the entire
network. Click the Use Individual Vector Scale
check box to use or ignore individual vector scale.
To assign a weight to a specific vector, see Section
9.3.2, Edit vectors, Page 9-6
The Weighting Method options are:
Method

Option

Description

with Use individual vector

scale not selected

This selection applies weights

computed using the model specified
in the Standard Weight section of
the Network Adjustment
Parameters dialog box.

Standard
Weight

with Use individual vector

scale selected

This selection applies weights

computed using the model as the
first option to be used; this value will
be multiplied to the individual
weighting scale for each vector.

Weight Matrix
from GPS
processing

with Use individual vector

scale not selected

This selection uses the inverse of the

covariance matrices obtained from
vector processing.

with Use individual vector

scale selected

This selection uses the weights

assigned in the Vector Editors (see
Section 9.3.2, Edit vectors, Page
9-6); this value will be multiplied to
the individual weighting scale for
each vector.

Standard
Weight

Weight Matrix
from GPS
processing

For more detailed information, see Section 12.3.5, Apply weight settings, Page
12-12.

12-10

Spectrum Survey

Adjust a Network
12.3.4.2

Chapter 12

Options tab
Select the Options tab to choose whether to select other quantities to solve
during adjustment and whether to update coordinates based on adjustment.

Localization section
You can use the following Localization choices to automatically solve for
specific regional settings in your network.
Solve Horizontal.............. (Solve for Horizontal Rotation) Select this check
box to solve the difference between derived GPS
north and the networks north value
Solve Scale........................ (Solve for Scale Difference) Select this check box
to solve the difference is the ratio between the size
of network defined by GPS observations and the
published values of fixed points
Solve E-W.......................... (Solve for E-W Deflection of the Vertical) Select
this check box to indicate whether the East-West
deflection values should be used to determine
height transformations.The deflection of the
vertical is the angle between the same point on the
ellipsoidal normal and the gravity vertical
Solve N-S .......................... (Solve for N-S Deflection of the Vertical) Select
this check box to indicate whether the North-South
deflection values should be used to determine
height transformations

Spectrum Survey

12-11

Chapter 12

Adjust a Network
Point Coordinates section
Select the Update Point Coordinates After Adjustment check box if you
want point coordinates in the project to be updated after an adjustment. If
you select this option, you can then select the Only Update Point
Coordinates After Constrained Adjustment check box to cause point
coordinates to only be updated if the adjustment was constrained.

Note: If the option Update Point Coordinates After Adjustment is not

selected, points within the current project will not be modified when an
adjustment iteration is completed. This option must be selected if you
wish to export adjusted coordinates from Spectrum Survey (see Chapter
14, Export Results); otherwise, adjusted coordinate data will only be
available in network adjustment reports.

When updating points during a constrained network adjustment, pay

attention to the accuracy of the coordinates and uniformly locate a sufficient
number of fixed points at the periphery of the network, preferably located in
three of the four quadrants of the network. Also, be sure to evaluate the
estimated values (For Example, by comparing minimally constrained
adjustment results to published values).

Note: For more information on designating a fixed point, minimally

constrained (free) adjustments and constrained adjustments, see Section
12.3.2, Fix a point, on Page 12-5.

The Point Coordinates section also displays a Transform Map Coordinates

to Ground Coordinates check box which, when selected, will calculate and
display the ground coordinates (N, E and if applicable orthometric) in the
network adjustment report. For more information see Section 13.3.1.5,
Transformation into ground coordinates, Page 13-12.

12.3.5

Apply weight settings

The weight of a vector indicates the amount of influence that will be
applied by each vector in the network. The greater the weight value applied
to a vector, the less that vector will shift during adjustment.

12-12

Spectrum Survey

Adjust a Network

Chapter 12
You can select from several weight methods:

First, by completing the Standard Weight and Weighting Method

groups within the Network Adjustment Parameters dialog box to assign
a weighting scale to the entire network.

Second, by specifying an individual weighting scale for a vector in the

Processing tab of the Vector Editor dialog box or to multiple vectors by
using the Vector Selection dialog box. For more information, see Section
9.3.2, Edit vectors, Page 9-6.

During vector processing, in addition to the three vector components, the

covariance matrix showing their expected precision is computed for each
vector. Ideally, if this covariance matrix accurately expresses the precision of
the vector components, its inverse matrix should be used in network
adjustment as its weight. However, this covariance matrix generally
estimates higher precision than the real precision, which may be caused by
the effect of various physical phenomena contained in the carrier phase on
the observational data.
If this optimistic covariance matrix derived from GPS processing is used
directly for network adjustment, then statistical tests of the results, such as
tests on standard deviation of unit weight and tests on the residuals of
observations, may not be valid. The following methods are often used:

The standard deviation of empirically obtained vector components is

used, disregarding the processed covariance matrix. In Spectrum Survey,
this technique is called the method of standard weight.

The empirically obtained precision is obtained by multiplying a specific

scale factor to the covariance matrix of the vectors derived from vector
processing.

In Spectrum Survey, either method can be used; however, using the standard
weight method is recommended. It is worth noting that multiplying the
same factor to all covariance matrices will not change the results (coordinates
of unknown points and residuals), although the tests might succeed.
For a description of how to use individual vector weighting to detect
blunders, see Baardas data snooping technique, Page 13-8.
Spectrum Survey

12-13

Chapter 12

12.3.6

Adjust a Network

Review point and vector data

The Point Editor (see Section 8.4.1, Point editor, Page 8-6) and the Vector
Editor (see Section 9.3.2, Edit vectors, Page 9-6) enables you to view your
survey data. In the Point Editor you can edit individual points, remove
points from a network and fix individual points to serve as controls in
network adjustments. In the Vector Editor you can disable or remove suspect
vectors, identify redundant vectors, and weight specific vectors. Use the
Point and Vector Lists to refine your data and assist you in detecting gross
errors in the observations. For more information, see Chapter 11, Troubleshoot
With Loop Closures.

12.3.7

Review the plan view

The Plan View (see Section 3.2, Plan View, Page 3-6) is also updated to reflect
the results of calculations. You can use the displayed information to analyze
the network and perform more network adjustments.

12.4 Calculate the Network Adjustment

Calculating a network adjustment is a simple procedure. If you have just
finished processing your data (so it is already selected) proceed to step 3;
otherwise (in case you have been working with your data and it is no longer
selected for adjustment), follow all these steps to perform a network
adjustment:
1.

12-14

Select Views | Plan Views | Adjustment View from the menu.

Spectrum Survey

Adjust a Network

Chapter 12
2.

Choose Select | All from the main menu to select all the data for
adjustment, or select only specific data using the Vector List and
Trajectory List dialog boxes. The description for selecting data for
adjustment is analogous to selecting data for processing. See Section
9.3.7, Select objects, Page 9-31.

3.

From the Tools | Run Adjustment menu option, select Full Adjustment,
Coordinates Only or Check Only.

As long as you have sufficient control specified, and the network vectors
selected are contiguous, you can adjust a network. For more information, see
Section 12.3.2, Fix a point, Page 12-5.
If your network does not have enough points fixed, a message will appear
asking if you want the software to automatically fix the points. Respond
<Yes> or <No>. If you select <Yes>, Spectrum Survey will automatically
choose a reference site that was used in GPS processing, if available. If one is
not available, Spectrum Survey will choose the first available point to fix.
If during adjustment an observation is found to exist between two fixed
points (control stations), a warning will display asking you if you want to
continue with the adjustment. If you select <Yes>, the adjustment will
continue and the observation will be ignored. If you select <No>, the
adjustment will end.
Spectrum Survey will perform the adjustment and will generate the results
of the calculations in the selected type of report. Layout options for the report
are set in the Adjustment Report Options dialog box accessed by selecting
Analysis | Adjustments | Report Options from the main menu. For more
information on this dialog box, see Section 13.1.1, Residual display options, on
Page 13-1.
The adjustment report (*.prt) will be displayed in the main window. There is
also an error log report, opened by selecting
Analysis | Adjustment | Error Log, and a residuals report (*.rsd), opened
by selecting Analysis | Adjustment | Residuals Report.

Spectrum Survey

12-15

Chapter 12

Adjust a Network
You can use the information provided by these reports to help plan further
adjustments if necessary. For more information on interpreting network
adjustment reports, see Section 13.3, Network Adjustment Reports, Page 13-4.

12.5 View Residuals

After adjusting your data, Spectrum Survey enables you to quickly view
both residuals and standardized residuals. Residuals are a measure of how
much a vector was moved to accommodate a network adjustment, or a
change in point or vector data. Analyzing residuals is one of the strongest
methods of debugging your network. For more information, see Section
13.3.2, Residuals reports, Page 13-17.

12.6 Generate Reports

Each time an adjustment is performed in Spectrum Survey, a Network
Adjustment Report is automatically generated and displayed. Use these
reports to guide your network adjustment process. For more information, see
Section 13.2, Interpret Reports, Page 13-3.

12-16

Spectrum Survey

Chapter 13 Analyze Adjustment Results

The results generated by Spectrum Surveys functions and calculations can
be viewed in report form, and adjusted information can be exported as an
*.sdr file type for use with other software or devices. Generally, before
exporting any data, you should review the integrity of the data by consulting
the various reports.
The following sections provide a description of the various file types
Spectrum Survey generates, and instructions on how to export your results.

13.1 Manage Adjustment Reports

Each time you initiate an adjustment in Spectrum Survey, the program
produces data reports that contain the results of the adjustment. These
reports can be analyzed to guide additional data refinement, blunder
detectors and adjustment iterations or to determine if the data is ready for
export. For more information on managing reports in Spectrum Survey, see
Section 3.5, Manage Reports, Page 3-21.

13.1.1

Residual display options

Spectrum Survey enables you to sort the display of vector data in the
residual and adjustment reports and set the coordinate display for vector
observations and residuals. By default, Spectrum Survey sorts entries in
Residuals ascending order in the local geodetic (LG) reference frame (as
dN, dE, dHgt).

Spectrum Survey

13-1

Analyze Adjustment Results

Chapter 13

To change your report options, choose Analysis | Adjustment | Report

Options from the main menu. The Adjustment Report Options dialog box
will display:

From this dialog box, you can choose to sort your adjusted data by one of the
following options:
Residuals Ascending ............. Orders entries with smallest residual values at
the top and the largest values at the bottom.
Residuals Descending........... Orders entries with the largest residual values
at the top and the smallest values at the
bottom.
Standardized ........................... Orders entries with the smallest
Residuals Ascending
standardized residual values at the top and the
largest values at the bottom.
Standardized ........................... Orders entries with the largest
Residuals Descending
standardized residual values at the top and the
smallest values at the bottom.
Vector Name ............................ Orders entries according to their appearance in
the Vector Editor list.

13-2

Note: Any selection you make in Sort By will remain active until you
change them again.

Spectrum Survey

Analyze Adjustment Results

Chapter 13

Select one of the following options in the Reference Frame section to

configure the display of vector observations and residuals:
XYZ Cartesian ......................... Select this option to display data in the
(ECEF) differences
standard XYZ cartesian coordinates
Localized Northing, ............... Select this option to display coordinate
Easting, and Height
difference data in the local geodetic (LG)
differences
reference frame (as dN, dE, dHgt). This option
is the default selection

Note: The Observations and Residuals, Reliability of Observations

and the Corrected Observations sections in the Network Adjustment
Report will all display data according to which option you choose in the
Reference Frame section.

13.2 Interpret Reports

Reports generated by Spectrum Survey can be analyzed to guide the
adjustment process and to determine when coordinate data is acceptable
according to your project specifications. The remaining sections of this
chapter provide descriptions of each adjustment report type that Spectrum
Survey generates. In addition to a text description, excerpts from sample
reports are provided for reference.

Spectrum Survey

Note: The sample reports listed in this manual may be excerpts from
complete reports. In many cases, only the parts of a report relevant to
you understanding the concept are included.

13-3

Analyze Adjustment Results

Chapter 13

13.3 Network Adjustment Reports

Each time you perform a network adjustment, Spectrum Survey generates
up to three reports:

Adjustment report (Page 13-4)

Residuals report (Page 13-17)

Error log (Page 13-19)

The full adjustment report provides extensive details about the network
following the adjustment calculations. The residuals report can be quickly
used to determine how to debug the network prior to future adjustments.
The error log can be used to identify possible problems with a network or
adjustment parameters.

13.3.1

Adjustment reports
The adjustment report consists of seven major sections, they are as follows:

13-4

Network Adjustment Description (Page 13-5)

Input Coordinates and Corrections (Page 13-9)

Adjusted Coordinates and Standard Deviations (Page 13-10)

Transformation into Map Coordinates * Optional (Page 13-11)

Transformation into Ground Coordinates * Optional (Page 13-12)

Observations and Residuals (Page 13-14)

Reliability of Observations (Page 13-14)

Relative Precision (Page 13-16)

Spectrum Survey

Analyze Adjustment Results

13.3.1.1

Chapter 13

Network adjustment description

This section provides a detailed description of the most recent network
adjustment; including Project and Adjustment Settings, additional
parameters or criteria selected, weight options applied and a summary of
adjustment statistics.
Spectrum Survey 3.24
Network Adjustment Report
-------------------------------------------------------------------Project: C:\Sokkia\Common\Spectrum Projects\sitea.spr
Adjustment Time:
2000/12/08 18:19:42 (LOCAL)
Time Zone: GMT-7.00h
Adjustment Type:
Free
Computation Level:
Full Adjustment
Additional Parameters:
- Deflection of vertical (N-S)
Not used
- Deflection of vertical (E-W)
Not used
- Horizontal rotation
Not used
- Scale difference
Not used
Iteration Criteria:
- Maximum iteration
5
- Maximum coordinate difference (m)
0.0001
Reference Datum:
- Datum Name
NAD83
- Semi-major axis (m)
6378137.000
- Flattening (m)
1.0/298.257222096
Weight Options:
- Use modeled standard deviations
- Ignore individual weighting scale
Modeled Standard Deviations
- X component
5.0 mm +
1.0 ppm
- Y component
5.0 mm +
1.0 ppm
- Z component
5.0 mm +
1.0 ppm
Geoid Model:
FIXED
- Orthometric heights for the current project will be computed
using a fixed undulation value of: 2 m
Transformation to Map Coordinate System
...YES
- System name
UTM
- System type Universal Transverse Mercator, Automatic (UTM-A)
- Linear unit
(meters)
- Parameters: Latitude
N 0 00 00.00000
Longitude
E 0 00 00.00000
False Northing (m)
0
False Easting (m)
0
Scale
0.9996
- Centroid:
Latitude
N 33 59 56.41471
Longitude
W118 19 49.76063
Elevation (m)
41.843
Northing
Easting
Combined Factor

Spectrum Survey

377126.614
3762843.389
0.99918176

13-5

Analyze Adjustment Results

Chapter 13

-------------------------------------------------------------------Summary of Adjustment Statistics

-------------------------------------------------------------------Number of Points:
- Horizontal fixed & height fixed
1
- Horizontal fixed & height free
0
- Horizontal free & height fixed
0
- Horizontal free & height free
3
----total
4
Number of Unknowns:
- Latitude
- Longitude
- Height
- Additional parameters

Number
- X
- Y
- Z

(a)

3
3
3
0
----total
9

(b)

6
6
6
----total
18

of observations
component
component
component

Number of Rank Defect

(c)
0
Number of Total Redundancy
(b)+(c)-(a)
9
Iterations Used
5
-------------------------------------------------------------------Chi Square Test on the Variance Factor
-------------------------------------------------------------------Total Number of Observations:
18
Redundancy
9
Confindence Level:
95%
A Priori Variance Factor:
1.0000
A Posteriori Variance Factor (VF): 1.9216
Chi Square Test on the Variance Factor (1.9216)
0.3000 < VF < 2.1133
The Test PASSES!

Chi Square Test on the Variance Factor

The Chi Square Test on the Variance Factor section of the network
adjustment description is an index for indicating the compatibility between
the weight applied to vector observations, and the precision estimated for
these vectors in the adjustment. The closer the value is to 1.0, the better the
applied weight.

13-6

Spectrum Survey

Analyze Adjustment Results

Chapter 13

The Chi Square test determines the compatibility of the A Posteriori

Variance Factor (estimated variance factor) and the A Priori Variance Factor
(selected variance factor).
In this section, redundancy of the network indicates the following:

Number of redundant observations

Difference between the number of observations and the number of

unknown quantities included in the network adjustment

The estimated variance values, printed under the A Posteriori Variance

Factor, are the lower and the upper limit of the range corresponding to a
statistical test for the variance factor (square of standard deviation of unit
weight) with a confidence level of 95% or 99% (depending what you chose in
the General tab of the Adjustment Parameters dialog box. See Section 12.3.4,
Apply adjustment settings, Page 12-6).
When the estimated variance value is smaller than the lower limit, this
indicates that the precision of observation was better than the one assumed.
When the value is greater than the upper limit, this indicates the reverse, or
that some observations may contain blunders.
If the value of the estimated variance factor is between the upper and lower
boundary values printed below it, and if the maximum standardized
residuals is less than 4.13, than the values in the adjustment and the weight
used are typically considered free from errors.
The following errors can prevent the two conditions above from being
satisfied:

Observed values contain blunders

The weight used is not appropriate

If observed values contain blunders, then only a few observations should

have test values bigger than 4.13 or smaller than -4.13. On the full adjustment
reports (or residuals report) Observations and Residuals section, these
values will be marked by a double asterisk.

Spectrum Survey

13-7

Analyze Adjustment Results

Chapter 13

The observation with the largest absolute value should be the one that
contains blunders. To confirm which vector contains blunders you may use
Baardas data snooping technique.
Baardas data snooping technique
1.

Select Edit | Vector from the main menu. The Vector Editor dialog box
will display. Click on the Processing tab.

2.

Choose the suspect vector from the Vector field located at the top of the
dialog box.

3.

Set the weighting scale to 0.1 in the Solution Weight field.

4.

Click <OK> to save the changes.

5.

Calculate another network adjustment.

13-8

Note: If network adjustment results in the residual of the suspect vector

further increase in size, and the residuals of nearby vectors decrease,
then that vector contains the blunder. The vector should be removed
from the network before performing the next adjustment.

Spectrum Survey

Analyze Adjustment Results

6.

Chapter 13

(optional) Repeat steps 1-5, removing suspect vectors one by one (not
more than one at the same adjustment) until you correct the
observational errors in your network.

If the weight used is not appropriate, many observations will have big
absolute test values. This is likely to occur when the covariance matrix
obtained from vector analysis has been used for the weighting. Using the
standard modeled weight in such situations is recommended.
If the weight is appropriate, the test values for each of the X,Y and Z
components will have a standard normal distribution N (0,1) after errors
have been estimated. Standard deviations for the standard modeled weight
should be estimated from an extensive number of examples. Convenient
values for each individual adjustment should be avoided.

13.3.1.2

Note: When a standard modeled weight is applied in the network

adjustment, standard deviations of unit weight for each vector
component will be displayed in the Relative Precision section of the full
adjustment report.

Input coordinates and corrections

The Input Coordinates and Corrections section of the full adjustment report
lists and describes the corrections applied to each point within the network.
The entry for each point lists the following:

Spectrum Survey

Station number and station name

Input coordinates (latitude, longitude, and height)

Corrections applied in seconds

Corrections in meters

13-9

Analyze Adjustment Results

Chapter 13

Distance and azimuth of the horizontal correction

-------------------------------------------------------------------Input Coordinates and Corrections
-------------------------------------------------------------------Point
Input Coordinates
Corrections
Horizontal
Seconds
m
Vector
Base
P
33 56 20.55753
0.00000
0.000
0.000 m
FIXED
L -118 14 38.76262
0.00000
0.000
0 deg
H
-4.776 m
0.000

13.3.1.3

Adjusted coordinates and standard deviations

The Adjusted Coordinates and Standard Deviations section lists and
describes post-adjustment information about the points in the network. The
entry for each point includes:

Station name

Adjusted coordinates (latitude, longitude, and height)

Standard deviation for latitude and longitude in 0.001 seconds

Standard deviation in mm

Length and azimuth of the semi-major axis of a 95% or 99% error ellipse

Length of the semi-minor axis of a 95% or 99% error ellipse (depending

on what confidence level you set in the Adjustment Parameters dialog
box, see Section 12.3.4, Apply adjustment settings, on Page 12-6)
-------------------------------------------------------------------Adjusted Coordinates and Standard Deviations
-------------------------------------------------------------------Point
Adjusted Coordinates
Std Dev
95% Ellipse
(0.001sec)
(mm)
Base
P
33 56 20.55753
0.00000
0.0 major
0.0 mm
FIXED
L -118 14 38.76262
0.00000
0.0 azm.
0
deg
H -4.776 m
0.0
minor
0.0 mm
Site2

P
34 01 47.00059
0.46202
14.2 major
34.8 mm
L -118 12 30.24517
0.55492
14.2 azm.
0
deg
H 58.555 m
14.2
minor
34.8 mm
-------------------------------------------------------------------Undulation Values Used
-------------------------------------------------------------------- Orthometric heights for the current project will be computed
using a fixed undulation value of: 2.000 m

13-10

Spectrum Survey

Analyze Adjustment Results

Chapter 13

Point error ellipsis

An error ellipse is a measure of the horizontal position precision of a point.
The error ellipse indicated in the Adjusted Coordinates and Standard
Deviations section is the ellipse for absolute position precision and shows
the area inside of which the true position of the unknown point will fall.
Spectrum Survey uses a 95% or 99% confidence level (depending what you
set in the Adjustment Parameters dialog box, see Section 12.3.4, Apply
adjustment settings, on Page 12-6). It is worth noting that the probability of the
ellipse, called the standard error ellipse, is 39.4%, and its size is 2.4 and 3.03
times smaller than the 95% and 99% confidence ellipse, respectively.

13.3.1.4

Note: Spectrum Survey also displays relative error ellipsis for relative
precision in the full adjustment reports Relative Precision section of the
full adjustment report. For more information, see Relative error ellipsis,
Page 13-17.

Transform into map coordinates

If you selected a Map Projection as your coordinate system, the adjustment
report will display a Transformation into Map Coordinates section that lists
each point in the network as adjusted map coordinates. The entry for each
point includes:

Spectrum Survey

Station name

Adjusted geodetic coordinates (latitude, longitude, and ellipsoidal

height)

Transformed map coordinates (northing and easting and orthometric

height if a geoid is selected)

13-11

Analyze Adjustment Results

Chapter 13

Meridian convergence angle and scale factor (if supported by the

selected coordinate system)
-------------------------------------------------------------------Transformation into Map Coordinates (meters)
-------------------------------------------------------------------Point Name Geodetic Coordinate Map Coordinate
Conv./Scale
Base
P
33 56 20.55753
N
3756094.291
- 0 41 40.81487
L -118 14 38.76262
E
385024.564
0.99976296
H
-4.776
O
-6.776
Site2
P
34 01 47.00059
N
3766109.947
- 0 40 34.74819
L -118 12 30.24517
E
388442.513
0.99975341
H
58.555
O
56.555
Site3
P
34 04 08.79530
N
3770756.749
- 0 48 28.25372
L -118 26 30.76338
E
366948.283
0.99981822
H
108.746
O
106.746
Site1
P
33 57 29.30595
N
3758432.709
- 0 47 51.14555
L -118 25 39.27236
E
368096.678
0.99981448
H
5.004
O
3.004

13.3.1.5

Transformation into ground coordinates

If the Transform Map Coordinates to Ground Coordinates check box is
selected on the Network Adjustment Parameters dialog box, and a Map
Projection has been selected as the coordinate system, the report will display
a Transformation into Ground Coordinates section that lists each point in
the network as adjusted ground coordinates. The entry for each point
includes:

13-12

Station name

Adjusted geodetic coordinates (latitude, longitude, and ellipsoidal

height)

Transformed ground coordinates based on the selected map projection

(northing, easting and orthometric height if a geoid is selected)

Spectrum Survey

Analyze Adjustment Results

Chapter 13

Note: Ground coordinates are only displayed if that option is supported

by the map projection. If not, a message is displayed stating that the
ground coordinates are not available for the selected map projection.
-------------------------------------------------------------------Transformation to Ground Coordinates (meters)
-------------------------------------------------------------------Point Name
Geodetic Coordinate
Ground Coordinate

Spectrum Survey

Base

P
33 56 20.55753
L -118 14 38.76262
H
-4.776

N
E
O

3756088.608
385031.215
-4.776

Site2

P
34 01 46.99033
L -118 12 30.24120
H
57.810

N
E
O

3766112.412
388452.248
57.810

Site3

P
34 04 08.79392
L -118 26 30.76414
H
108.350

N
E
O

3770762.932
366940.255
108.350

13-13

Analyze Adjustment Results

Chapter 13
13.3.1.6

Observations and residuals

This Observations and Residuals section of the full adjustment report
contains information identical to that in the residuals report generated by
Spectrum Survey. For more information on the residuals report, see Residuals
reports, Page 13-17.
-------------------------------------------------------------------Observations and Residuals
-------------------------------------------------------------------Observations
Std Dev
Residuals
Standardized
PPM
(m)
(m)
(m)
Residuals
Vector: Site2-Site1
dx -19911.3256
dy
5736.8820
dz
-6613.0466

weight= 1.00
0.0223
0.0223
0.0223

-0.022
-0.026
0.027

0.000
0.000
1.491

1.004
1.176
1.243

Vector: Site2-Site3
dx -17835.4440
dy
12345.2725
dz
3648.0642

weight= 1.00
0.0226
0.0226
0.0226

-0.021
-0.025
0.027

0.000
0.000
1.502

0.962
1.147
1.228

Vector: Base-Site3
dx -12294.8135
dy
15692.5261
dz
12023.7595

weight= 1.00
0.0238
0.0238
0.0238

0.015
0.022
-0.022

0.774
1.129
0.000

0.655
0.955
0.951

Vector: Base-Site1
dx -14370.6991
dy
9084.1379
dz
1762.6483

weight= 1.00
0.0178
0.0178
0.0178

0.019
0.020
-0.022

1.456
1.537
0.000

1.086
1.146
1.268

Vector: Base-Site2
dx
5540.6786
dy
3347.3149
dz
8375.6315

weight= 1.00
0.0117
0.0117
0.0117

-0.012
-0.014
0.015

0.000
0.000
2.618 *

1.105
1.307
1.391

Vector: Site3-Site1
dx
-2075.8796
dy
-6608.3890
dz -10261.1133

weight= 1.00
0.0134
0.0134
0.0134

-0.003
-0.002
0.003

-0.372
-0.263
0.356

0.212
0.149
0.202

* - Possible Outlier
** - Likely Outlier

13.3.1.7

Reliability of observations
The Reliability of Observations section of the full adjustment report lists
point and vector information, and indicates the reliability of each point.

13-14

Spectrum Survey

Analyze Adjustment Results

Chapter 13

The entry for each vector includes:

Start and end points of each vector

Standard deviation of corrected components

Standard deviation of residuals

Redundancy part of each component

Internal and external reliability

-------------------------------------------------------------------Reliability of Observations
-------------------------------------------------------------------Standard Deviations
Reliability
Corr Obs Residuals
Redundancy
Internal External
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
Vector: Base-Site2 weight= 1.00
X
14.24
7.79
0.23
Y
14.24
7.79
0.23
Z
14.24
7.79
0.23
Vector: Base-Site3 weight= 1.00
X
18.55
27.30
0.68
Y
18.55
27.30
0.68
Z
18.55
27.30
0.68

100.70
100.70
100.70

7.55
7.55
7.55

118.89
118.89
118.89

2.81
2.81
2.81

Reliability
Spectrum Survey differentiates between internal reliability and external
reliability. Internal reliability is the magnitude of the smallest error in the
observation which can be found by the statistical test (assuming that only the
observation to be tested have a gross error). It is called a marginally
detectable error. External reliability is a measure of the influence of the
marginally detectable error on the adjusted coordinates. More specifically,
external reliability is the square root of the norm of the influence for all
unknown coordinates.
Analyze redundancy values
When a standard modeled weight is applied in the network adjustment,
redundancy for each vector component is displayed beside the
corresponding standard deviation.

Spectrum Survey

13-15

Analyze Adjustment Results

Chapter 13

Note: The sum of this redundancy of the vector components equals the
redundancy value of the network. For more information, see Chi Square
Test on the Variance Factor, Page 13-6.

The redundancy for each vector component serves two purposes:

As an index showing the contribution of individual observations to the

redundancy of the network

As an index showing how much each observation can be checked by

other observations

The redundancy value for each vector component ranges from 0 to 1.0 when
observations are statistically independent of each other. Observations are
statistically independent when the standard modeled weight is used in the
adjustment. A bigger value indicates that the respective observation can be
checked better, and 0 indicates that the observation cannot be checked
(tested) at all.
13.3.1.8

Relative precision
The Relative Precision is the final section of the full adjustment report. This
section lists the precision of components of each vector in the network. The
entry for each vector includes:

13-16

Start and end point of each vector

Ellipsoidal distance, height difference, and azimuth of each vector in

meters

Standard deviation of the ellipsoidal distance, height difference, and

ellipsoidal azimuth

Distance ratio of standard deviation of ellipsoidal distance and height

difference

Length and azimuth of the semi-major axis and length of semi-minor

axis of a 99% or 95% error ellipse (as set in the adjustment parameters)
for the horizontal coordinate difference

Spectrum Survey

Analyze Adjustment Results

Chapter 13

-------------------------------------------------------------------Relative Precision
-------------------------------------------------------------------Ellip. Dist.
Height Diff.
Relative
Azimuth
Std Dev
Precision
95% Ellipse
(m)
(mm)
Vector: Base-Site2
10585.364
63.331
18 08 50.1

weight= 1.00
14.2
14.2
0.3sec

Hor. 1/743227
Ver. 1/743577

major 34.9 mm
azm. 90 deg
minor 34.8 mm

Vector: Base-Site3
23280.191
113.522
308 21 03.9

weight= 1.00
18.6
18.5
0.2sec

Hor. 1/1254692
Ver. 1/1255032

major 45.4 mm
azm. 90 deg
minor 45.4 mm

Relative error ellipsis

A point error ellipse is a measure of the horizontal position precision of a
point. The relative error ellipse indicated in the Relative Precision section of
the adjustment report shows the precision of differences between two points,
with a specific probability.
The confidence level used in Spectrum Survey is 95% or 99% (depending
what you set in the Adjustment Parameters dialog box, see Section 12.3.4,
Apply adjustment settings, on Page 12-6) and it is called the relative error
ellipse. It is worth noting that the probability of the ellipse is 39.4%, and its
size is 2.4 and 3.03 times smaller than the 95% and 99% confidence ellipse,
respectively.

13.3.2

Note: Spectrums network adjustment also displays point error ellipsis

for absolute position precision in the Adjusted Coordinates and
Standard Deviations section of the adjustment report.

Residuals reports
One of the two reports generated by a network adjustment calculation is the
residuals report. Residuals are a measure of how much a vector is moved to
accommodate a network adjustment or a change in point or vector data.
Analyzing residuals is one of the strongest methods of debugging your

Spectrum Survey

13-17

Analyze Adjustment Results

Chapter 13

network. By analyzing residual reports you can determine if a vector is a

blunder, to what degree it affects other vectors in the network, or if
expectations where initially too optimistic for the project.
The residuals report consists of a list of vectors and the description of their
residuals. The entry for each vector indicates the following:

Start and end point of each vector

Individual weighting scale of each vector

Vector components (dx, dy, and dz)

Standard deviation of each vector

Residuals and standardized residuals of each vector

Precision of each vector (in parts per million)

-------------------------------------------------------------------Observations and Residuals
-------------------------------------------------------------------Observations
Std Dev
Residuals
Standardized
PPM
(m)
(m)
(m)
Residuals

13.3.2.1

Vector: Site2-Site1
dx -19911.3256
dy
5736.8820
dz
-6613.0466

weight= 1.00
0.0223
0.0223
0.0223

-0.022
-0.026
0.027

0.000
0.000
0.000

1.011
1.197
1.250

Vector: Site2-Site3
dx -17835.4441
dy
12345.2725
dz
3648.0643

weight= 1.00
0.0226
0.0226
0.0226

-0.021
-0.026
0.027

0.000
0.000
0.000

0.964
1.167
1.230

Corrected observations and distance measures

This section of the residuals report includes the following items:

13-18

Start and end point of each vector

Corrected observations and their standard deviations

Horizontal grid or geodetic distance (grid if a coordinate system is used)

Spectrum Survey

Analyze Adjustment Results

Chapter 13

Horizontal ground distance if the coordinate system supports it (in other

words, if the coordinate system supports meridian convergence and
scale factor)
-------------------------------------------------------------------Corrected Observations and Distance Measures
-------------------------------------------------------------------Corrected
Corr Obs
Horizontal
Horizontal
Observations
Std Dev
Grid Dist.
Ground Dist.
(meters)
(meters)
(meters)
(meters)
Vector:
X
Y
Z

13.3.2.2

Base-Site2
5540.667
3347.301
8375.646

0.0142
0.0142
0.0142

10582.804

10585.372

Analyze residual reports

Generally, the absolute value of the residual does not indicate the error of an
observation. Therefore, Spectrum Survey checks for errors in observations
with a more appropriate quantity called the standardized residual. The
standardized residual is obtained by dividing the residual by the standard
deviation of the residual and has a standard normal distribution N (0,1).
As a guide for discovering blunders, * is displayed next to test values
having an absolute value of 2.58 to 4.13, and ** for the value in excess of
4.13. The value 2.58 corresponds to a statistical test at a 99.5% confidence
level and the critical value 4.13 corresponds to a data snooping test at a 99.9%
confidence level and 80% power of the test.

13.3.3

Adjustment error log

When the network adjustment is started, the input data will be checked as
much as possible before the actual adjustment is performed. If any error is
detected in this logical check, an error message will be displayed on the
screen explaining the nature of the error detected. If any error is found after
the logical check has passed, a similar message will be displayed with a
different process name according to the process in which the error is found.

Spectrum Survey

13-19

Analyze Adjustment Results

Chapter 13

The error message will display a code, level and error message in the
following format:
Spectrum Survey 3.24
Network Adjustment Error Log
-----------------------------------------------------------Project: C:\Sokkia\Common\Spectrum Projects\SiteA.spr
Adjustment Time:
2000/11/06 15:26:44 (LOCAL)
Time Zone: GMT-6.00h
Computation Level:
Full adjustment
Code Level
Message
-----------------------------------------------------------3020 Error Network consists of more than one block.
2020 Error At least one vertical and one horizontal fixed point
are needed.

Each error message has the following three components:

Code .......................................... Code number associated with the message
Level.......................................... Severity of the error. Warn indicates a warning;
calculations will continue. Error indicates a
fatal error; the adjustment will abort
Error Message.......................... Cause of the error

13-20

Note: For more information about adjustment messages and a complete

listing and description of the messages, refer to the Adjustment
Messages subsection of the System Messages section in the Spectrum
Survey Suite Advanced Reference Materials.

Spectrum Survey

Chapter 14 Export Results

After you have processed and adjusted your data sufficiently to meet project
requirements, Spectrum Survey enables you to export the final results of
your work in both ASCII and *.sdr file formats. The *.sdr file can be used by
any device or software that supports the *.sdr format.
You can also export your results in a *.sdr format to Sokkias ProLINK
survey reduction software. ProLINK will enable you to customize your data
according to your project specifications and even transfer the data files back
to a data collector.
The *.sdr file that Spectrum Survey creates contains the following
information:

File header and job identifier information

GPS base station details

Coordinate projection information (method, projection origin coordinate

and scale factor)

GPS vector observations from your source point to your target point

Using the information in the *.sdr file, the computed station coordinates can
be determined in the data collector.
Spectrum Survey provides three ASCII file formats for exporting:

Spectrum Survey

Vectors (vector solutions and trajectory points)

Trajectories (epoch-by-epoch trajectory solutions)

Points (exporting point solutions)

14-1

Chapter 14

Export Results

14.1 Export Vector Solutions and Trajectory Points

When you select Tools | Export | Vectors from the main menu, the Vector
Export dialog box appears.

In the Vector Export dialog box, you can select solved (already processed)
vectors for export. The Export Filter list is used to select a filter type to apply
to the vectors listed in the dialog boxs list window. The filter is applied to all
processed vectors in the current project.
The available filter types in the list include the following:
Last Processed .................. Only those processed vectors that were solved in
the last processing session for the project are
visible in the dialog boxs main list window
Processed........................... All processed vectors in the current project are
visible in the dialog boxs main list window
Last Adjusted ................... (with *.sdr option only) Only those vectors that
were adjusted in the last adjustment session for the
project are visible in the dialog boxs main list
window

14-2

Spectrum Survey

Export Results

Chapter 14
Adjusted............................ (with *.sdr option only) All adjusted vectors in the
current project are visible in the dialog boxs main
list window
The main window is used to display all processed or adjusted vectors (and
individual vector occupations) that may be selected; that is, those that pass
through the currently selected vector filter. When opened, the window does
not show the selection status of the vectors (occupations) currently selected
in the Plan View (all vectors are deselected when the dialog box is opened).

Note: When the Last Adjusted or Adjusted filters are selected, only the
adjusted solution (best) will be seen for each vector (no individual
occupations). Also, vector solution information is no longer
differentiated by the method it was collected; adjusted vector and
trajectory point data is presented together.

Records are shown collapsed by default; click the + sign beside each
record to expand it to display the associated occupation data. Doing so
turns the + sign into a -sign; click on it to compress the record again.
Vector occupation records (shown when a vector in the window is expanded)
are arranged according to five headings that run across the top of the
window. The headings are different depending on whether you have
Processed or Adjusted filters selected.
When a Processed filter is selected, the columns appear as follows:
Vector/Occupations ......... Lists the vector name and, if expanded, the
occupations information
Start Times........................ When a vector listing is expanded, this shows the
earliest occupation time
Duration ............................ When a vector listing is expanded, this shows the
entire occupation time

Spectrum Survey

14-3

Chapter 14

Export Results
Solution............................. The solution type used to solve the vector
occupation. The possible solution types for a static
vector solution are shown in Table 4:
Table 4: Baseline Solution Codes
Solution Code

Description

PSR(r)

Raw Pseudoranges

L1

L1 fixed

L1f

L1 float

L2

L2 fixed

L3

L3 fixed

L3f

L3 float

L4

L4 fixed

L5

L5 fixed

RMS ................................... The root-mean-square (RMS) value associated with

the solution vector for the vector, expressed in
user-specified units
When an Adjusted filter is selected, the columns appear as follows:
Vector .................................Lists the vector name and, if expanded, the
occupations information
Slope Distance .................When a vector listing is expanded, this shows the
adjusted distance between the points
Horizontal .........................When a vector listing is expanded, this shows the
horizontal accuracy
Vertical............................... When a vector listing is expanded, this shows the
vertical accuracy
Adj. Type........................... Shows how the data was adjusted. For Example, if
one static point was fixed, this column will display
Free, and if more than one, this column will
display Constrained

14-4

Spectrum Survey

Export Results

Chapter 14
Vectors can be exported in *.sdr , *.sgl or *.iob formats. Follow these steps to
export your data:
1.

While holding down the <Ctrl> key, click (select) the desired vectors
and/or occupations. If you want to select all vectors and occupations for
export, simply click <Select All>.

2.

Select the desired format from the Export Format list.

3.

Click on <OK> to select these highlighted records for export.

14.1.1

Note: Clicking <Cancel> will close the window without exporting any
files.

*.SDR format
Exporting to the *.sdr format enables you to use the results with a data
collector that uses *.sdr files.
After you select your vectors, choose the *.sdr format, and click <OK> in the
Vector Export dialog box, the SDR Vector Export dialog box appears.

Using this dialog box, you may choose to enter the coordinates for the seed
point (starting point) displayed on the dialog box. By entering coordinates
you tell the software to propagate the position of all the other points off the
coordinates you just entered.
Typically, it is fine to leave the coordinates on this dialog box with their
default values 0.000; however, if you have desired coordinates for the seed
point, you may edit the Easting and Northing fields.

Spectrum Survey

14-5

Chapter 14

Export Results
Coordinates entered in the SDR Vector Export dialog box are stored in a
GSTN (GPS/RTK station) record. For more information on GSTN records,
please refer to your ProLINK Users Manual.
When you are finished entering information into the SDR Vector Export
dialog box, click <OK> and the Save As dialog box will automatically
appear.

The Save As dialog box is used to select a destination directory and file name
for the file to be generated from the vector occupations selected in the Vector
Export dialog box.
The default directory location is the Results folder located in your project
directory.
The Save as Type list contains a single option, SDR Files (*.sdr). This is the
only filter that may be applied.
After supplying a valid file name and destination, click <OK> to generate the
export file. If the filename you choose already exists, you will be asked
whether or not to overwrite the file. Choose <Yes> to overwrite the file with
the new data, or choose <No> to go back to the Save As dialog box and
choose a different name. The vector export file created by Spectrum Survey is
a *.sdr format file.
Only vectors that are contiguous (joined to one another) can be exported. If
you select vectors to export that are not contiguous, an error message will be
generated stating that Vectors are not contiguous, and you will be returned
to the Vector Export dialog box.

14-6

Spectrum Survey

Export Results

Chapter 14
If the vectors are exported successfully, the Vector Export dialog box is closed
and you are returned to the Plan View window. You can monitor the export
success using the progress bar displayed on the screen. This bar will
increment for each point processed during the check for contiguous baselines
and during the export.
The *.sdr file created by the vector export process displays the seed point as
the first point and uses the seed coordinates you specified to calculate the
positions of the other points.
This is an extraction from a *.sdr file:
00NM V04-03.24 12-Jan-02 12:13 111111
10NM
121111
13CPSea level crn: N
13CPC and R crn: N
13CPAtmos crn: N
13CCPlane Curv Crn: Yes
14RKG
0000002100110710520891
15RKRock
0.000000
0.000000
0 0 0 0 0
19RK133.83205340 -118.13720178 -24.135 0.000 0.000
01
57RK0.00000000
16RKRock
Base 18933.312
89.94398175
304.21830724
16RKRock
Highway 30285.845
90.07966861
297.58227771
16RKRock
Light Pole 28893.231
90.09068883
317.49788318

14.1.2

14

0 14
0 14
0 14

*.IOB format
The Export to GeoLab dialog box appears; note that the title displays the
total number of observations that have been selected for export.

Spectrum Survey

Note: Only processed vector solutions can be exported. Adjusted

information is not available.

14-7

Chapter 14

Export Results
The Export to GeoLab dialog box is used to select a destination directory and
file name for the file to be generated from the vector occupations selected in
the Vector Export dialog box.
The default directory location is the Results folder located in your project
directory. Each *.iob file created is by default given the name spcsrvx.iob,
where x is an automatically incrementing number. For example spcsrv1.iob.
The Save File as Type list contains a single option, GeoLab (*.iob). This is the
only filter that may be applied.
After supplying a valid file name and destination, click <OK> to generate the
export file. The vector export file created by Spectrum Survey is a GeoLab
Input Observation (*.iob) format file. This file is a packed file containing
GeoLab processing option (OPT) information, approximate coordinate (APX)
information, and post-processed GPS vector (GPS) information. The packed
*.iob file provided by Spectrum Survey may later be split into its respective
components using software designed for this purpose. No geoid undulation
information is provided for this export file.
The following is an extraction from an *.iob file:
TITL
ELIP
HIST
PADJ
PLH
PLH
*
GRP
3DD
DXYZ
COV
ELEM
ELEM
ELEM
END

14-8

Spectrum Survey Project [SiteA]

WGS84 6378137.0000 6356752.3142 0.0
0.0
0.0
END GPS Observations (standardized residuals)
YES YES NO NO YES YES
000 Base
N 33 56 20.557525 W118 14 38.762624 -4.7760
000 Site3
N 34 4 8.795087 W118 26 30.762981 108.6810
1 Solutions
SiteA[a1d] 1
Base
CT UPPR 0.0
1.422833e-04
4.667008e-05
2.678051e-05

Site3 -12294.8135
15692.5261
12023.75953
1.0
0.0
1.0
0.0
1.662840e-05
-3.584267e-05
-1.734309e-05

Spectrum Survey

Export Results

Chapter 14
The file has three sections:
OPT .................................... (Option) Contains GeoLab processing options that
are considered typical when using vector
observation information generated from GPS data.
Only the project name on line 1 changes; the rest of
the section will be the same each time it is output

Line 1 [TITL] specifies a title for the output observation group.

Line 2 [ELIP] specifies the reference system (ellipsoid) for the

adjustment. This is for use in GeoLab computations. WGS84 is the
output reference frame for the coordinate data provided by Spectrum
Survey.

Line 3 [HIST] specifies that a histogram of standardized residuals

should be printed using all observations

Line 4 [PADJ] specifies which adjusted values are printed after the
adjustment is completed. Typically, (1) Northing, Easting, and
Orthometric Height will be output; (2) Lat, Long, and Ellipsoidal Height
will be output; (3) Lat, Long, and Orthometric Height will not be output;
(4) Cartesian XYZ ellipsoidal coordinates will not be output; (5)
Auxiliary parameters used in the adjustment will be output; (6) Scale
factor and meridian convergence will be output.

APX .................................... (Approximate Coordinates) Contains approximate

coordinates for the points connected to the vector
observations in the file
An approximate coordinate is output for every point record attached to a
vector record that has been selected for export (only one record per point).
This section of the file may be used to specify which points in the adjustment
should be used as vertical, horizontal, or 3-D control points.

Spectrum Survey

Note: For the Spectrum Survey GeoLab Export File, none of the points
are specified as references, even if they were used as reference points
during vector processing. Each line of the APX section contains a single
coordinate record, a GeoLab PLH record containing the Lat, Lon, and
Ellipsoidal Hgt for the point.

14-9

Chapter 14

Export Results
GPS .................................... (GPS Observation Data) Contains the computed
vector solution information. At the beginning of
the GPS file section there is a single line indicating
the number of vector solutions to be presented in
the section. For each vector observation there are
seven lines in the GeoLab Export File:

14-10

Line 1 [GRP] specifies the observation group name for the vector
observation to be listed.

Line 2 [3DD] contains simply the three letters 3DD, meaning that the
lines that follow contain a 3-dimensional coordinate difference.

Line 3 [DXYZ] contains a vector record. DXYZ indicates that the

difference vector is given as XYZ Cartesian coordinate differences. The
point name of the from point for the vector is listed first, followed by
the point name of the to point for the vector. The X, Y, and Z
components for the Cartesian vector (representing the vector) follow.

Line 4 [COV] is the same for every vector observation record block. This
line marks the beginning of accuracy information for the vector. The
three words indicate that the accuracy information will be presented as
an upper triangular covariance matrix in the conventional terrestrial
reference frame. The series of 0s and 1s indicate that matrix contents
will not be scaled or offset by any additive constants.

Line 5 [ELEM] contains the first row for the upper triangle of the
covariance matrix. The three numbers that follow the ELEM keyword on
this line are the COV_XX, COV_XY, and COV_XZ elements associated
with the vector.

Line 6 [ELEM] contains the second row for the upper triangle of the
covariance matrix. The two numbers that follow the ELEM keyword on
this line are the COV_YY, and COV_YZ elements associated with the
vector.

Line 7 [ELEM] contains the last row for the upper triangle of the
covariance matrix. The number following the ELEM keyword on this line
is the COV_ZZ element associated with the vector.

Spectrum Survey

Export Results

Chapter 14

14.2 Export Trajectory Solutions

The Trajectory Export dialog box is used to select solved trajectories (already
processed) for output to a Trajectory Export file. This Trajectory Export file is
an ASCII-format file that provides summary information about processed
trajectories, as well as an epoch-by-epoch output of the trajectory solution
computed by Spectrum Survey.
One of the noteworthy features of Spectrum Survey is the way that it handles
rover observations that are not time-tag aligned. Spectrum Survey
interpolates observations for tagged observations if the rover observations
are not time-tag aligned (For example, if the rover computed observations
every second, and the base computed observations every five seconds,
Spectrum Survey will interpolate the base observations during
post-processing to determine what the position would have been every
second (the time that observations were recorded by the rover). Once
observation times match between the rover and the base, Spectrum Survey
can solve trajectories.). Thus, all data is present in the Trajectory output file.
The Trajectory Export dialog box is accessed by choosing the Tools | Export
| Trajectories menu item.

Spectrum Survey

14-11

Chapter 14

Export Results
The Trajectory Filter list is used to select a filter type to apply to the
trajectories available for display in the dialog boxs list window. The filter is
applied to all processed trajectories in the current project.
The available filter types in the list include:
Last Processed .................. Only those processed trajectories that were solved
in the last processing session for the project are
visible in the dialog boxs main list window
All Processed.................... All processed trajectories in the current project are
visible in the dialog boxs main list window
The main window is used to display only processed trajectories. The
displayed list is limited to those trajectories that pass through the currently
selected trajectory filter. No trajectories in the window are highlighted when
the dialog box is opened.
Trajectory records are arranged according to three headings that run across
the top of the window: Trajectory, Common Times, and Points.
Only one trajectory record can be highlighted at a time. Click a deselected
trajectory record to select it for export; any other trajectory that was
highlighted becomes automatically deselected - you cannot deselect
trajectory records any other way.
The Export Options fields enable you to select the amount of detail that goes
into the epoch records that make up the body of the exported trajectory file.
The options are:
Positions............................ (Default) Position output
Std Deviations .................(Default) Standard deviations output. This check
box is only enabled if the Positions or Velocities
check boxes are selected. If both the Positions and
Velocities check boxes are selected along with the
Std Deviation check box, then standard deviations
for both the position and velocity components will
be provided

14-12

Spectrum Survey

Export Results

Chapter 14
Velocities........................... Velocity output. If this check box is selected, the
Mapping (E, N) format will not be available in the
Coordinate Format list
GDOP ................................ (Default) The instantaneous value at that epoch,
expressed to a single decimal place representing
the geometric dilution of precision (position and
time)
Header ............................... Enables you to select whether or not to create a
section in the report about how and when the
trajectory was processed. This checkbox is always
selected by default and is enabled when ASCII is
selected in the Export Format list.
Export Format................... Enables you to select the format in which to export
your trajectory data: ASCII or IMAP. When IMAP
is selected, all fields in the Export Options section,
except the Export Format list, become unavailable
Height Format .................. Enables you to select the rover height to be
exported: Ellipsoidal or Orthometric
Coordinate Format .......... Enables you to select the position type that is
output for the rover coordinates at each epoch of
the exported trajectory file. The two options
available in the Coordinate Format list are
Mapping (E, N), and Geographic (Lat, Lon). The
availability of these options depends on which
coordinate system is currently selected
Click <OK> to select the highlighted trajectory record for export, and to open
the Export to dialog box.

Spectrum Survey

14-13

Chapter 14

14.2.1

Export Results

Export to ASCII
When exporting trajectories to ASCII format, this dialog box will appear:

The Export to ASCII dialog box is used to select a destination directory and
file name for the ASCII export file to be generated from the trajectories
selected in the Trajectory Export dialog box. The default directory location is
the Results folder located in your project directory.
The Save as Type list contains two options; ASCII (*.txt), and Others (*.*).
Allow the default selection ASCII to be your choice. When you have entered
a valid file name, click on <OK> to generate the Trajectory Export file.
The epoch records for the file are output with the level of detail dependant
on the options you chose in the Trajectory Export dialog box. An example of
a trajectory export to ASCII file is seen in ASCII Export File, Page 15.

14.2.2

Export to IMap
When exporting trajectories to IMAP format, this dialog box will appear.

14-14

Spectrum Survey

Export Results

Chapter 14
The Export to IMAP dialog box is analogous to the Export to ASCII dialog
box with the exception that the Save as Type list contains IMAP (*.imp)
instead of ASCII (*.txt). An example of a trajectory export to ASCII file is
seen in IMAP export file, Page 18.

14.2.2.1

ASCII Export File

This is an example of a partial printout of a trajectory export to ASCII file
produced as a result of the Positions, Std Deviations and GDOP check
boxes being selected and the Velocities check box remaining unchecked.
Spectrum Survey 3.24
TRAJECTORY EPOCH FILE
TRAJECTORY:MAR2BASE-TONY
Pos/StdDev/GDOP
-----------------------------------------------------------------Project:C:\Sokkia\Common\Spectrum Projects\SiteA.spr
Coordinate System:GEO [Geographic]
Datum:WGS84
Geoid Model:<None>
Units:Meters
Processing Date:2002/02/05 18:33:38.79 (UTC)
Ephemeris:Broadcast
Clock Model:Broadcast
BASE STATION:MAR2BASE [C:\...Spectrum Projects\SiteA\Data\MAR2BASE.P
-----------------------------------------------------------------Point Occupation:001 Antenna Height:1.607 [Slant:1.586]
Antenna Model:6100_Slant(meters)
WGS84 (meters)
WGS84 (meters)
X: -2512789.350
Lat: N 33 51 9.733712
Y: -4669081.306
Lon: W118 17 17.120330
Z: 3532840.928
Hgt: -87.755
ROVER INFORMATION (TONY)
[C:\...\Spectrum Projects\SiteA\Data\Tony.pdc]
-----------------------------------------------------------------Antenna Height (vertical):2.147 meters
TRAJECTORY RESULTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------Processing Interval:1.0 second
Time Interval:1999/03/02 22:23:35 to 1999/03/02 22:48:39 (UTC)
[25 min.]
Observations:9006
Observations Used:8923
[ 99.08% ]
1999/03/02
22:23:35.00,4,6,33.85269330,-118.28809877,-88.014,0.0056,0.0066,0.02
98,5.0
1999/03/02
22:23:36.00,4,6,33.85269344,-118.28809905,-87.885,0.0047,0.0024,0.01
17,5.0
1999/03/02
22:23:37.00,4,6,33.85269337,-118.28809909,-87.880,0.0047,0.0024,0.01
17,5.0
1999/03/02
22:23:38.00,4,6,33.85269336,-118.28809916,-87.884,0.0047,0.0024,0.01
17,5.0

Spectrum Survey

14-15

Chapter 14

Export Results
The following is a partial printout of a trajectory export to ASCII file
produced as a result of the Positions check box remaining selected and the
GDOP, Std Deviations and Velocities check boxes being unchecked.
Spectrum Survey 3.24
TRAJECTORY EPOCH FILE
TRAJECTORY:MAR2BASE-TONY
Pos
------------------------------------------------------------------Project:C:\Sokkia\Common\Spectrum Projects\SiteA.spr
Coordinate System:GEO [Geographic]
Datum:WGS84
Geoid Model:<None>
Units:Meters
Processing Date:2002/02/05 18:33:38.79 (UTC)
Ephemeris:Broadcast
Clock Model:Broadcast
BASE STATION:MAR2BASE [C:\...Spectrum Projects\SiteA\Data\MAR2BASE.P
------------------------------------------------------------------Point Occupation:001 Antenna Height:1.607 [Slant:1.586]
Antenna Model:6100_Slant(meters)
WGS84 (meters)
WGS84 (meters)
X: -2512789.350
Lat: N 33 51 9.733712
Y: -4669081.306
Lon: W118 17 17.120330
Z: 3532840.928
Hgt: -87.755
ROVER INFORMATION (TONY) [C:\...\Spectrum
Projects\SiteA\Data\Tony.pdc]
------------------------------------------------------------------Antenna Height (vertical):2.147 meters
TRAJECTORY RESULTS
------------------------------------------------------------------Processing Interval:1.0 second
Time Interval:1999/03/02 22:23:35 to 1999/03/02 22:48:39 (UTC)
[25 min.]
Observations:9006
Observations Used: 8923 [ 99.08% ]
1999/03/02 22:23:35.00,4,6,33.85269330,-118.28809877,-88.014
1999/03/02 22:23:37.00,4,6,33.85269337,-118.28809909,-87.880
1999/03/02 22:23:38.00,4,6,33.85269336,-118.28809916,-87.884

Both of these Trajectory Epoch files have several sections. The first few are
similar to those in the Trajectory Summary file (See Section 10.5.1, Trajectory
summary, Page 10-23).
Header .............................. Describes how and when the trajectory was
processed
Base Station ..................... Describes the point used as the base in processing
the trajectory
Rover .................................Describes the rover used in processing the
trajectory
Trajectory .......................... The epoch-by-epoch solution records for the
Results
trajectory. Each epoch solution record is contained
on a single line in the output file

14-16

Spectrum Survey

Export Results

Chapter 14
For the export format, the first three fields are, from left to right:
<time tag> <solution type> <number of satellites>

Depending on the options chosen in the Trajectory Export dialog box the
number of fields that follow may vary. For the example where only the
Positions check box is selected, the fields are, from left to right:
<time tag> <solution type> <number of satellites> <latitude> <longitude>
<elevation>

For the example where Positions, Std Deviations, and GDOP are selected,
the fields are, from left to right:
<time tag><solution type><number of satellites> <latitude> <longitude>
<elevation> <std.dev.latitude> <std.dev.longitude>
<std.dev.elevation><GDOP>

In the case where Velocities is also selected, the Velocity field will be shown
before the GDOP field.
Time Tag............................(Time Tag for the Epoch) Is expressed in the
current time format for the project
Solution Type ................... (Solution Type for the Epoch) Is represented by a
single integer value
Table 5: Trajectory Solution Types
Solution Types

Spectrum Survey

Description

Auto

Pseudorange raw

Pseudorange filtered

Pseudorange smoothed

L1 fixed

L2 fixed

L3 fixed

L4 fixed

L5 fixed

L1 float

10

L3 float

14-17

Chapter 14

Export Results
Num of Satellites............. (Number of Satellites Used in Computing the
Solution) Is expressed as an integer
Lat/Lon/Elev ..................... The Latitude, Longitude, and Elevation record
elements are a 3-D coordinate triple representing
the position of the rover unit at the specified
epoch. The coordinate is represented in the current
reference frame for the project, using either
mapping coordinates (X,Y, and Ht) or geographic
coordinates (Lat, Lon, and Ht)
Std Dev.............................. The Standard Deviation fields for Latitude,
Longitude, and Elevation represent the standard
deviations associated with each of the three
coordinates seen above. These standard deviations
are presented in the linear unit of the selected
reference system (in other words, meters or feet)
Velocities........................... Velocity components of the rover unit (m/s or ft/s)
GDOP ................................ The instantaneous value at that epoch, expressed
to a single decimal place

14.2.3

IMAP export file

This is an example of a partial printout of a trajectory export to IMAP file.
$STA
$STA
$STA
$STA
$STA
$STA
$STA
$STA
$STA
$STA
$STA
$STA
$STA

253415.00
253416.00
253417.00
253418.00
253419.00
253420.00
253421.00
253422.00
253423.00
253424.00
253425.00
253426.00
253427.00

999
999
999
999
999
999
999
999
999
999
999
999
999

33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33

51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51

9.696
9.696
9.696
9.696
9.696
9.696
9.696
9.695
9.696
9.696
9.696
9.696
9.696

-118
-118
-118
-118
-118
-118
-118
-118
-118
-118
-118
-118
-118

17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17

17.156
17.157
17.157
17.157
17.157
17.157
17.157
17.157
17.157
17.157
17.157
17.157
17.157

-88.014
-87.885
-87.880
-87.884
-87.881
-87.883
-87.892
-87.887
-87.898
-87.895
-87.891
-87.897
-87.887

The data exported in the IMap export file (*.imp) is in a format suitable for
the IMap PC software, which uses uses this file to update corresponding
position information.

14-18

Spectrum Survey

Export Results

Chapter 14
In the IMAP export file, each processed epoch of the trajectory is shown on a
single line. The table below illustrates what each column of information
means.
Record
Identifier
$STA

GPS Week for

GPS
Processed
Seconds of
Epoch
Week
253415.00

999

Epoch
Latitude

Epoch
Longitude

Epoch
Ellipsoidal
Height

33 51 9.691

-118 17 17.170

-87.495

All coordinate output (latitude, longitude, and height) will be computed on

the datum of your projects currently selected coordinate system.

14.3 Export Point Solutions

The Point Export dialog box is used to select solved point coordinate
solutions for output to a Point Coordinate Export file. This Point Export file
is an ASCII-format file that provides information about individual point
solutions computed by Spectrum Survey.
Select Tools | Export | Points from the main menu to open the Point Export
dialog box.

The Point Filter field is used to select a filter type to apply to both the points
available for display in the Point Export dialog boxs window and the points
available for export. The filter is applied to all points in the current project.

Spectrum Survey

14-19

Chapter 14

Export Results
The available filter types in the list include:
All Points .......................... All points in the project are visible
Last Processed .................. Only those points that were solved in the last
processing session for the project are visible
Processed........................... All processed points in the project are visible
Last Adjusted ................... Only those points adjusted in the last adjustment
session for the project are visible
Adjusted............................ All adjusted points in the project are visible
The main window is used to display those points that pass through the
currently selected filter. No points in the window are highlighted when the
dialog box is opened.
Point records are arranged according to four headings that run across the top
of the window:
Point name........................ Name of the point
Process date ...................... Date and time the raw data was processed
Source ................................ Indicates the origin of the position. It can be one of
the following:

14-20

Static Message

Description

Field

Obtained from the GPS receiver or data collector

Average

Calculated through single-point averaging

Vector

Computed with respect to a vector where <solution type> could be

any valid vector solution type. Note that L2 float is not a valid
solution type

Trajectory

Obtained from a static occupation within a rover file where

<solution type> could be any valid vector solution type. Note that
L2 float is not a valid solution type

User input

Entered directly from the Point Editor dialog box

Adjustment

Indicates if the currently displayed point coordinate is derived from

the solution of a network adjustment

Spectrum Survey

Export Results

Chapter 14
Control............................... Shows which type of control is associated with the
point; either G, H or V. G represents GPS, and
indicates that the point was used as a reference
during post-processing. H represents Horizontal
control point for adjustment, and V represents
Vertical. Both H and V are applied to data as a
control during adjustment. It is possible for data to
have all, some or one of these controls attached to
them. For example, GHV
Multiple point records can be highlighted at a time. Click a deselected record
to select it for export; click on a highlighted record to deselect it. If you want
to select all point records, click <Select All>.
From the Export Options section, choose the export format (ASCII or *.sdr)
from the Export Format list. If you choose to export your points in ASCII
format, you have to also choose the height and coordinate formats from the
following lists:
Height Format .................. Enables you to select the height that is output for
the point list. Two options are available:
Ellipsoidal and Orthometric
Coordinate Format .......... Enables you to select the position type that is
output for the point list. Six options are available:
Mapping (N, E)
Mapping (E, N)
Geographic (Lat, Lon)
Geographic (Lon, Lat)
Ground Coordinates (N, E)
Ground Coordinates (E, N).
The availability of these options depends on which coordinate system is
currently selected for your project.

Spectrum Survey

14-21

Chapter 14

Export Results
Additionally, when you choose ASCII as the export format, you can choose
whether to select the following checkbox:
Header ............................... Enables you to choose whether or not to include a
section in the export that displays how and when
the point was processed. The checkbox is always
displayed and selected by default.
Click <OK> to select the highlighted record(s) for export.

14.3.1

Exporting ground coordinates

If you selected to export the points in ASCII format with the
Ground Coordinates selected as the Coordinate Format, a Select Ground
Coordinate Seed Point dialog box will automatically appear when you click
<OK> on the Point Export dialog box; otherwise, the Export dialog box will
appear (see Section 14.3.2, Export dialog box, on Page 14-24).

14-22

Note: If your current coordinate system does not support you being able
to export your points in Ground Coordinate format, a warning message
will display and you will be returned to the Point Export dialog box. To
continue with the export to Ground Coordinate format, change your
current mapping system to one that supports mapping scale and
convergence.

Spectrum Survey

Export Results

Chapter 14
The Select Ground Coordinate Seed Point dialog box enables you to choose
one of the points selected for export as a seed point around which all other
exported point ground coordinates will be localized.
Typically, you would not set a seed point and would leave the
Selected Ground Control Point field as is and click <OK> to continue with
the export; however, if you require to change the coordinates you can do so
using the following fields:
Selected Ground.............. Contains the names of all points that were
Control Point
selected for export in the Point Export dialog box.
By default, this list will display None. Select a
point from this list first before information will
display in the other fields
Current Coordinates ....... Displays the current position of the point (in
current mapping system). This information is for
display only and cannot be edited
Desired Ground............... Displays the current position of the point.
Coordinates
This information can be edited
Information ...................... Displays your current coordinate system along
with the linear units (For example, UTM (Meters)),
the number of points that are currently selected for
export and the combined factor at centroid. This
information is presented as read-only and cannot
be edited
When points are exported, the ground coordinates are computed by directly
applying to the points the combined factor of the centroid of all points
selected for export. If a seed point was chosen, the points are translated by
the offset you previously specified. It is important to note that Spectrum
Survey does not localize the ground coordinates, which means it does not
use ground distances to solve for the ground coordinates

Spectrum Survey

14-23

Chapter 14

Export Results
If you choose to select a seed coordinate, the following also applies during
export:

Ground coordinates will be generated using the difference between the

user-supplied coordinates for the seed point and the actual computed
ground coordinates for the seed point.

This difference (value) will be applied to all points selected for ground
coordinate export.

When the height format is selected as Orthometric, the geoidal

undulation will also be applied to each exported point coordinate.

When you are finished editing, click <OK> to close the Select Ground
Coordinate Seed Point dialog box and automatically go to the Export dialog
box.

14.3.2

Export dialog box

This dialog box automatically appears during point export.

The Export dialog box is used to select a destination directory and file name
for the file to be generated from the selected points. The default directory
location is the Results folder located in your project directory. Each file
created is by default given the name pointsxx.txt (when exported as an ASCII
file) or pointsxx.sdr (when exported as a *.sdr file), where xx is an
automatically incrementing number. For example points01.txt.
The Save as Type list contains two options, ASCII (*.txt) or SDR(*.sdr) and
Others (*.*). Allow the default to remain as your choice.

14-24

Spectrum Survey

Export Results

Chapter 14
When you have entered a valid file name, click on <OK> to generate a Point
Coordinate Export file.
This is a sample ASCII file:
Spectrum Survey 3.24
POINT EXPORT
---------------------------------------------------------------------Project: C:\Sokkia\Common\Spectrum Projects\Project1.spr
Coordinate System: GEO [Geographic]
Datum: WGS84
Geoid Model: <None>
Units: Meters
Export Date: 2002/02/05 11:57:19 (UTC)
Point Name, Latitude, Longitude, Ell. Height, Point Description
---------------------------------------------------------------------MAR2BASE,33.85270381,-118.28808898,-87.755,
PT002,33.85317414,-118.28775522,-88.841,
PT003,33.85333099,-118.28660967,-89.076,
PT004,33.85214007,-118.28659504,-89.549,
PT001,33.85234217,-118.28775500,-88.661,
PT005,33.85233688,-118.28832666,-87.478,
PT006,33.85336804,-118.28826932,-88.211,
ST006,33.85336827,-118.28826910,-88.204,

Each point ASCII file contains a header section which displays the following
information: software name, export title (POINT EXPORT), project name
and path, export date, coordinate system, datum, geoid model, and units
(linear).
Following the header, each point record is contained on a single line, and
consists of the point name followed by the point position in the format that
was selected in the Position Format export option. Following the position is
the points associated code value (as seen in the Point Editor dialog box). If
the point does not have an associated code, this field will display empty in
the report. As displayed in the sample file above, the end of each line shows
an empty space that would have contained code values if any had been
assigned.

Spectrum Survey

14-25

Chapter 14

Export Results
This is a sample ASCII file with Ground Coordinate format:
Spectrum Survey 3.24 POINT EXPORT
---------------------------------------------------------------------Project:
C:\Sokkia\Common\Spectrum Projects\SiteB.spr
Coordinate System:
UTM [Universal Transverse ...] Datum: NAD83
Geoid Model:
<None>
Units: Meters
Export Date:
2001/06/12 15:42:54 (Local) Time Zone: GMT-7.00h
Export Centroid
Northing:
Easting:
Height:

3757916.408
381186.366
16.931

Ground Seed Point:

Northing:
Easting:
Height:

Parking Lot
3766109.477
388437.927
58.974

Combine Factor: 0.99977

Grnd. Northing:
Grnd. Easting:
Grnd. Height:

3766109.477
388437.927
58.974

PointName, GroundEasting, GroundNorthing, Ell.Height, PointDescription

---------------------------------------------------------------------Rock,394863.288,3744972.335,-24.135,
Light Pole,375579.863,3766488.821,-4.327,
Road,381437.491,3766415.607,19.698,
Highway,368176.300,3759291.745,5.667,
Pine,367027.644,3771618.611,109.335,
Tree,385108.013,3756952.764,-4.634,
River,391474.665,3740522.368,-30.683,
Base,379326.350,3755791.862,22.482,
Parking Lot,388526.758,3766970.743,58.974,

When points are exported to an ASCII file using Ground Coordinate format,
the report will appear the same as for other ASCII exports but will display
the following additions:

14-26

Computed centroid for the points selected

Computed combined factor at the centroid

Name of the selected ground coordinate seed point (if any)

Associated mapping plane coordinate (current coordinate system) and

the user entered ground coordinate for the seed point

Spectrum Survey

Section 6 - Appendices
This section provides appendices that explain survey concepts, glossary terms, and index.
Section 6 includes:

Spectrum Survey Concepts

Glossary

Index

Appendix A

Spectrum Survey Concepts

The following terms and concepts are used in this manual and apply to the
Sokkia Spectrum Survey Suite software. Please familiarize yourself with these
definitions to better understand your surveying software. Details about these
concepts are found within this manual.

A.1

Point
A point usually refers to the location occupied by a GPS receiver or any other
survey instrument. Points whose positions are known are referred to as
reference sites, control points or "base stations." A survey network is
made up of at least three points.

A.2

Vector
A vector or baseline is the 3-D straight-line distance between two points.
For example, if a network consists of three points: PT1, PT2 and PT3, and GPS
data for each point has been observed simultaneously, the network will
consists of three vectors: PT1 - PT2, PT2 - PT3 and PT3 - PT1.

A.2.1

How do you create a vector?

Spectrum Survey

1.

Simultaneously collect GPS data at two static points.

2.

Import the GPS data for the two points into Spectrum Survey.

3.

Under Tools | Define Combinations ensure the Define vectors check

box is selected.

4.

Click <OK>

5.

The software will automatically generate a vector and display it in the

Plan View.

A-1

Appendix A

A.3

Spectrum Survey Concepts

Rover
A rover consists of a GPS receiver that collects data for a given time span,
typically while in motion. This type of data collection is called kinematic data
collection. While collecting kinematic data, a rover may occasionally stop
moving and collect static data at intermediate points for short periods of
time. This data collection technique is known as stop-and-go data collection.
The key difference between stop-and-go rover operation and simple static
data collection is that a rover continues to record GPS data during travel
between occupied points.

A.4

Trajectory
A trajectory is created using a rover and a stationary reference point, each
collecting continuous data over the same period of time. When this trajectory
data is processed, it very accurately defines the path taken by the rover with
respect to the selected reference point. This path may include intermediate
survey points collected with the rover. Depending upon the application, the
intermediate survey points identify important features such as a well site,
utility pole, tree, etc.

A.4.1

A-2

How do you create a trajectory?

1.

Simultaneously collect GPS data at the stationary base station (reference

site) and with a moving rover receiver. The rover will continuously
record data and may or may not (depending on application) survey
intermediate points.

2.

Import the GPS data for the base and rover into Spectrum Survey.

3.

Under Tools | Define Combinations ensure the Define trajectories

check box is selected.

4.

Click <OK>

5.

The software will automatically generate a trajectory and display it in the

Plan View.

Spectrum Survey

Spectrum Survey Concepts

A.5

Appendix A

Points in a Trajectory
A trajectory is created using a rover, which has collected a continuous stream
of data, and a stationary reference point, which has also continuously logged
data over the same time span. For rover data collection, the surveyor is
typically moving and may stop at specific points to name and time tag them
using a controller data collector. The rover file may or may not contain a
number of points.
If the rover file contains intermediate points, these trajectory points are
automatically created when the rover data file is imported to Spectrum
Survey. The difference between Trajectory points and the trajectory itself is
that trajectory points are the 3-D straight line distances from the base station
to the intermediate points, but a trajectory is the actual path the rover
followed while in motion. Trajectory points effectively define static vector
observations. Trajectory points differ from true static vectors because they
were collected during kinematic field operations, and this extra kinematic
data can be used when trajectory points are processed.
Trajectory point solutions are generated automatically from the processing of
any defined trajectories within your project. Once the data is processed, the
vectors within trajectory files can be treated as any other vector data and can
be used for loop closure analysis and in the adjustment process.

Spectrum Survey

A-3

Appendix B

Glossary of Terms & Acronyms

*.txt Format:
Spectrum Survey file format for exporting a
comma-delimited ASCII file and for loop closure
report. This file extension can be used with
spreadsheet, CAD or GIS programs.
*.gsr Format:
File format captured with a GSR100, GSR2100,
GSR2200, or GSR2300 receiver, containing satellite
measured data and point occupation details.
*.gss Format:
File format captured with a GSS1A receiver,
containing satellite measured data and point
occupation details.
*.prt Format:
File format for a Spectrum Survey network
adjustment report.
*.rsd Format:
File format for a Spectrum Survey residuals
report.
*.log Format:
File format for a Spectrum Survey error log.
*.sdr Format:
File format used for exporting results to data
collectors and other software programs. Solved
and known coordinates will be exported.
*.sgl Format:
File format used by Spectrum Survey, Sokkias
network adjustment software. Processed baselines
may be exported from Spectrum Survey in this
format.
*.sp3 Format:
GPS ephemeris file that contains precise orbit and
clock information.

Spectrum Survey

2DRMS:
Twice distance RMS that is, twice the RMS of the
horizontal errors For any GPS receiver in any
environment, the circle with a radius equal to
2DRMS contains between 95 98 percent of the
scatter. When HDOP is low, the percentage is
closer to 98%; when HDOP is high, it is closer to
95%.
Active view:
The active view is the one that currently has the
input focus. This window is displayed with a
caption of a different color. There can only be one
active view at a time.
Almanac:
Set of orbit parameters used to compute satellite
approximate positions and velocities at specific
epochs. It is collected from each satellite over the
course of 12.5 minutes. It contains orbital
parameter approximations for all satellites, GPS to
universal time conversion parameters, and singlefrequency ionospheric model parameters.
Moreover, for each set, there is a flag indicating if
these parameters are good or not (this flag is
known as health parameter).
Ambiguity:
The number of initial (often whole) cycles in a
single or double-difference observation.
Antenna Height:
The vertical distance between the position of the
observed point and the antenna phase center.
Approximate Coordinates:
Coordinates for a point which are supplied by the
user strictly to initialize the processor.

B-1

Appendix B

Glossary of Terms & Acronyms

Azimuth:
A horizontal angle measured clockwise from a
reference source. The reference, always from
north, is defined as zero.

Centroid:
Center of mass for all points in the system. The
coordinates of the centroid X, Y and Z are the
average X, Y, Z of all the points in the system.

Base:
A site whose position is fixed for the purpose of
generating a vector or a trajectory (collection of
epoch vectors).

COM1, COM2:
Serial communication ports on a computer.

Base Station (Receiver):

The GPS receiver that acts as the stationary
reference. It has a known position and transmits
messages for the rover receiver to use to calculate
its position.
Baseline:
A three-dimensional vector between two receivers
with concurrently tracked data.
Blunder:
An observational error
Carrier:
Radio wave with the characteristics of frequency,
amplitude and phase any of which may be
varied by modulation.
Carrier Phase Ambiguity (or sometimes ambiguity
for short):
The number of integer carrier phase cycles
between the user and the satellite at the start of
tracking.
Carrier Phase Measurements:
These are accumulated delta range
measurements. They contain the instantaneous
phase of the signal (modulo 1 cycle) plus some
arbitrary number of integer cycles. Once the
receiver is tracking the satellite, the integer
number of cycles correctly accumulates the
change in range seen by the receiver. When a lock
break occurs, this accumulated value can jump
an arbitrary integer number of cycles (this is called
a cycle slip).
Cartesian Coordinate System:
Also known as rectangular. Based on three
dimensions (x, y, z) and orientation axes.

B-2

Communication Device:
Source from which GPS files can be transferred
into the program, typically a GPS receiver or a
card reader.
Coordinates:
Linear or angular values describing a points
position relative to a specific reference frame.
Coordinate System:
A reference frame used to express a position,
usually in the form of ellipsoidal coordinates or
cartesian coordinates.
Coordinate Transformation:
Set of mathematical formulas used to transform a
set of geographic co-ordinate (latitude, longitude,
height) in rectangular co-ordinates (X, Y, Z).
Covariance:
A measure of the correlation of errors between
two observations or derived values.
Cycle:
One wavelength of a radio wave.
Cycle Slip:
When the carrier phase measurement jumps by an
arbitrary number of integer cycles. It is generally
caused by a break in the signal tracking due to
shading or some similar occurrence.
Data File:
Information file collected by a GPS receiver.
Datum:
In our context a datum could be defined as a set of
parameters (translations, rotations and scale) used
to establish the position of the reference ellipsoid
with respect to the earth center.
Datum Transformation:
See transformation on Page B-8.

Spectrum Survey

Glossary of Terms & Acronyms

Deflection of the Vertical:
The angle between the save point on the
ellipsoidal normal and the gravity field.
Deflections are separated into EW and NS
components.
Differential Processing:
See relative positioning on Page B-7.
Dilution of Precision (DOP):
The geometrical contribution to the uncertainty in
a position. The DOP factor is related to the volume
of the geometric figure whose apex is the receiver
and whose sides are defined by the vectors from
the receiver to each of the satellites being tracked.

EDOP Longitude of Easting (Onedimensional coordinate)

GDOP General (Three-dimensional
coordinates plus clock offset)
HDOP Horizontal (Two-dimensional
coordinates)
NDOP Latitude of Northing (Onedimensional coordinate)
PDOP Position (Three-dimensional
coordinates)
TDOP Time (One-dimensional coordinate)
VDOP Vertical (Height only)
RDOP Relative (average of the
instantaneous PDOPs over
observation time)

Double-Difference:
A position estimation algorithm that uses
observations that are differenced between receiver
channels and between the reference and remote
receivers.
Dry Temperature:
Equilibrium temperature that a regular
thermometer (dry bulb) measures.
Earth-Centered-Earth-Fixed (ECEF):
A right-hand Cartesian co-ordinate system with
its origin located at the center of the earth. This coordinate system is centered on the WGS84
reference ellipsoid has the Z axis aligned with the
Earths spin axis (through the North Pole), the X

Spectrum Survey

Appendix B
axis runs through the intersection of the Prime
Meridian (Greenwich) and the Equator, and the Y
axis is in the equatorial plane rotated 90 east of
the X axis about the Z axis.
Elevation:
The angle of a satellite above the horizon. Directly
overhead equals 90 elevation.
Elevation Mask:
The lowest elevation at which a receiver will track
a satellite.
Ellipsoid:
Spheroid which is defined by two parameters: the
semi-major axis a and the semi-minor axis b.
This spheroid can be seen as a revolving ellipse. It
is used to approximate the shape of Earth (the
geoid). It is used as a reference surface for geodetic
surveys.
Ellipsoidal Coordinate System:
Coordinate system based on an ellipsoid
definition with the parameters of semi major axis
and flattening. The positions are described by (,
, ); latitude, longitude and height.
Ellipsoidal Height:
The height relative to the ellipsoid the sum of the
geoidal height (or undulation) and the height
relative to the geoid (also called the orthometric
height).
Ephemeris:
A broadcast set of Keplerian orbital parameters
used to compute satellite positions.
Epoch:
The local time at which a GPS receiver takes a
measurement.
Epoch Computation:
Process that computes Visibility Data for each
epoch of the planning time span (according to the
computation interval).
Error Ellipse:
A computed statistical representation of the
horizontal position and the error orientation.

B-3

Appendix B
Fixed End:
The end point of a baseline vector which is fixed
for relative positioning of the solution end. The
fixed coordinates may be known, observed or
solved from previous baseline.
Fixed Integer:
Carrier phase ambiguities that are set to integer
values and then held constant.
Fixed Point Source:
The source for the coordinates of the fixed end of
a baseline vector. The source can be automatically
selected from or explicitly set to known
coordinates / observed coordinates / solved
coordinates from a previous baseline.
Fixed Solution:
The carrier phase observation model in which the
ambiguities have been fixed to their integer
values.
Float Solution:
The equation found by normalizing the
pseudorange distance and the carrier phase
observation in which the ambiguities are real
values.
Geoid:
The shape of the earth if it were considered as a sea
level surface extended continuously through the
continents. The geoid is an equipotential surface
coincident with mean sea level to which at every
point the plumb line (direction in which gravity
acts) is perpendicular. The geoid, affected by local
gravity disturbances, has an irregular shape. It is
approximated by mean sea level.
Geoidal Height:
The separation between the geoid and the
ellipsoid; also called the undulation.
GDOP:
See dilution of precision (DOP) on Page B-3.
Geoid Model:
A prediction of the Earths mean sea level surface
with respect to a mathematical ellipse.

B-4

Glossary of Terms & Acronyms

GPS:
Global Positioning System. A ranging system
from known positions of satellites in space to
unknown positions. GPS, developed by
Department of Defense, was conceived to
determine position, velocity, and time on or near
the earth on a continuous basis. Ranging is
accomplished by receiving and processing signals
transmitted by satellites with a receiver at the
position to be determined.
GPS Time:
A time system based on atomic scales. UTC was
coincident with GPS time at the standard GPS
epoch. As of mid-1999, UTC differed by 13
seconds.
HDOP:
See dilution of precision (DOP) on Page B-3.
Horizontal Rotation:
The difference between the direction of north
estimated using GPS observations at a designated
point (taking the datum transformation
parameters into consideration) and the direction
of north of an existing network defined by
published values of fixed points.
Initialization:
The technique used at the start of a kinematic
survey to determine the phase ambiguities. The
techniques include known, static and antenna
swap.
Iono-free Carrier Phase Observation:
A linear combination of L1 and L2 carrier phase
measurements which provides an estimate of the
carrier phase observation on one frequency with
the effects of the ionosphere removed. It provides
a different ambiguity value (non-integer) than a
simple measurement on that frequency.
Ionosphere:
The charged outer region of the earths
atmosphere, from approximately 60 to 1,000 km.
Ionospheric Refraction:
Carrier phase advance which occurs as satellite
signals pass through the ionosphere.

Spectrum Survey

Glossary of Terms & Acronyms

Iteration:
A cycle of adjustment including a logical check of
the coordinates and mathematical computations
correcting the positioning or points and vectors in
the network.
Kinematic:
The users GPS antenna is moving. In GPS, this
term is typically used with precise carrier phase
positioning, and the term dynamic is used with
pseudorange positioning.
Kinematic Project:
A type of project using data collected from a
kinematic survey. This project type can contain
only a single reference file and a single dependent
file. The reference file can contain only one point.
Kinematic Survey:
A survey technique where one receiver remains
fixed while a second receiver alternatively stops
and moves between points during the observation
period.
Known Coordinate:
A point whose coordinates have been determined
to the required accuracy.
L1:
The primary frequency used by the GPS system,
1575.42 MHz.
L1 Fixed:
solution using L1-only carrier phase
measurements; fixed ambiguities
L1 Float:
solution using L1-only carrier phase
measurements; floating ambiguities
L2:
The secondary frequency used by the GPS system,
1227.6 MHz.
L2 Fixed:
solution using L2-only carrier phase
measurements; fixed ambiguities
L3 Iono-Free Fixed:
ionospheric-free solution using L1 & L2 carrier
phase measurements; fixed ambiguities

Spectrum Survey

Appendix B
L3 Iono-Free Float:
ionospheric-free solution using L1 & L2 carrier
phase measurements; floating ambiguities.
L4 Fixed Widelane:
solution using the L1-L2 widelane carrier phase
combination; fixed ambiguities.
L5 Fixed Narrowlane:
solution using the L1+L2 narrowlane carrier phase
combination; fixed ambiguities.
Latitude:
The angle measured at the center of the earth from
the equator to the point of interest. The latitude is
0 at the equator and 90 at the North pole; -90 at
the South pole.
Log:
ASCII-formatted, baseline-specific report that
provides access to results and statistical data for
each processed baseline.
Longitude:
The angle measured at the center of the earth from
the Prime Meridian to the meridian of interest.
East longitudes are positive; west longitudes are
negative.
Loop Closure:
A loop closure is a method for pin-pointing
vectors with errors within a small form.
Loss of Lock:
A discontinuity of an integer number of cycles
resulting from a temporary loss-of-lock in the
carrier tracking loop. Often caused by an
obstruction.
Matrix:
Rectangular array of numbers organized in rows
and columns.
Meridian:
A north-south line on the earth's surface
connecting the poles.
Mean Sea Level:
See geoidal height on Page B-4.

B-5

Appendix B
Multipath:
Radio frequency interference caused by satellite
signals which have traveled different paths to
reach the receiver. Most often caused by reflective
objects in proximity to the receiver antenna.
Narrowlane:
A particular integer ambiguity value on one
carrier phase range measurement or doubledifference carrier phase observation when the sum
of the L1 and L2 measurements is used. It is a
carrier phase observable formed by adding L1 and
L2 carrier phase data: = 1 + 2. The
corresponding wavelength is 10.7 cm.
Network:
Series of linked vectors.
Network Adjustment:
A combination of mathematical equations that
modify, correct and confirm the positioning of a
connected series of points and vectors and to
correct survey data errors.
NGS:
National Geodetic Survey (United States).
Sometimes it is referred to as US NGS.
NGS Antenna ID:
The NGS antenna ID listing contains the phase
center offset values as computed and published by
NGS for various antenna models and
manufacturers as a function of elevation. The NGS
ID is just an ID number given to a antenna by the
National Geodetic Society. This ID number
identifies the antenna and associates the related
antenna phase center model observed and
generated by NGS.
Observation File:
A binary file that contains raw satellite
observations from a given receiver. This file will
also contain information regarding when the
receiver occupied a site and when it was roving.
Observation File ID:
This is a unique ID message used to reference a
specific observation file. The ID is derived from an
observation file name without the path or file

B-6

Glossary of Terms & Acronyms

extension, and is shown in all caps. If necessary a
2-digit number in square brackets may be attached
to the end of the message if files of the same name
but different path are included in the same project.
(For Example, FILENAME[02]). Note that
Observation File IDs for rover data files are also
used as the names for rover objects in the
project.
Obstruction:
Objects such as trees, mountains and houses
limiting the sky visible at a site. The fewer
obstructions are present, the better the site.
Occupation:
Series of consecutive observations taken while
located at a given site.
Orthometric Height:
See ellipsoidal height on Page B-3.
PDOP:
See dilution of precision (DOP) on Page B-3.
Plan View:
Graphic view used to represent geographic
position (in 2D) of all sites (using the user-defined
coordinate system) related to a specific project.
Point ID:
The unique point identifier for a data point.
Point Positioning:
Technique that uses pseudoranges from several
satellites to determine the approximate position of
a receiver, in contrast to relative positioning.
Position:
The coordinate of a point.
Precise Orbits:
Timed satellite precise positions used for
polynomial generation of satellite positions.
Project:
A series of occupation definitions and data files,
organized in a database. Links observations to
sites and site definitions. Links occupations to
external references, and to items whose positions
are required.

Spectrum Survey

Glossary of Terms & Acronyms

Appendix B

Projection:
See transformation on Page B-8.

Relative Precision:
Precision of difference between two points with a
specific probability.

PRN (Pseudorandom Noise) Number:

A number assigned by the GPS system designers
to a given set of pseudorandom codes. Typically, a
particular satellite will keep its PRN (and hence its
code assignment) indefinitely, or least for a long
period of time. It is commonly used as a way to
label a particular satellite.

Rover Site:
A site that will be used as the position to solve in a
vector. It is the GPS receiver whose position is
unknown, and needs to receive measurements
from a base station to calculate differential GPS
positions.

Propagation:
The process by which a wave travels through a
medium.

Residual:
The difference between the observed and
computed measurement

Pseudorange Measurements:
Measurements made using one of the
pseudorandom codes on the GPS signals. They
provide an unambiguous measure of the range to
the satellite including the effect of the satellite and
user clock biases.

Rover Receiver:
A GPS receiver (assumed to be mobile) which
generates a raw observation file. All raw
observations are considered to originate from a
rover, and can be processed accordingly.

RDOP:
See dilution of precision (DOP) on Page B-3.
Redundant Vector:
A vector measurement containing identical point
IDs as another vector contained in the current
network.
Reference Point:
A point used to initialize relative positioning for
one baseline or a series of dependent baselines.
The coordinates for the reference point may be
known or observed.
Reference Satellite:
In a double-difference implementation,
measurements are differenced between various
satellites on one receiver, to cancel the clock bias
effect. Usually, one satellite is chosen as the
reference, and all others are differenced with it.
Relative Humidity:
Measurement of moisture content in the air.
Relative Positioning:
Method of determining a points coordinates by
adding a vector to the coordinates of a known
point.

Spectrum Survey

RMS:
Root-mean-square, the square root of the average
of the squared errors RMS may be considered
essentially equivalent to one sigma (1 standard
deviation).
n

( xi x )2
i=1
----------------------------n1
where
n = number of measurements
x = average of all measurements
x = individual measurement
i = index factor
RINEX (Receiver Independent Exchange):
Standard file format for data collected on a
receiver. This file format facilitates data sharing
among various post-processing programs.
Spectrum Survey can use as RINEX files as input
and can provide receiver file output to this format.

B-7

Appendix B
Session:
Period of time over which GPS data is
simultaneously collected by two or more
receivers.
Session Time:
The time span that defines what data is accessible
(editable, viewable, processable).
Skyplot Graph:
This graph uses multicolored lines to represent the
azimuth and elevation traces of satellites. The
elevation mask is shown as a gray ring at the
outside of the graph. The center of the graph
represents 90 elevation (directly overhead).
Simultaneous Observation:
Multiple receivers tracking satellites at the same
time; GPS time tags are the same for observations
from the receivers.
Single Difference:
When two receivers track the same satellite at the
same epoch, the difference of the phase
observables between the two receivers is
calculated as the single difference.
Site:
A site is a named geographic position, defined in
three-dimensional space. A site can have
obstructions attached to it, describing the visible
sky at that location. It could be defined in a
spherical co-ordinate system (latitude, longitude,
height) or in an ECEF co-ordinate system (X, Y, Z),
or in a defined coordinate system (x, y and H).
Site-Occupation:
A set of consecutive observations taken by a given
receiver while located at a site.
Solution End:
The end point of a baseline vector for which
coordinates will be determined by relative
positioning.
Solution Type:
Processor Settings field to identify the various
carrier phase combinations to be used in solving
the ambiguities.

B-8

Glossary of Terms & Acronyms

Standard Deviation of Unit Weight:
An index for indicating the compatibility between
applied weight and the precision estimated.
Standardized Residual:
The residual of a measurement divided by the
standard deviation of the residual.
Static:
The users GPS antenna does not move.
Static Project:
A type of project using data collected from a static
survey. This project type can contain multiple
reference files and dependent files.
Static Survey:
A surveying technique where two receivers
remain fixed in position during the observation
period.
SV:
Space Vehicle ID, sometimes used as SVID; also
used interchangeably with Pseudo-Random Noise
Number (PRN).
Time Zone:
A location based on the number of hours east of
UTC (Coordinated Universal Time). Spectrum
Survey uses an incremental factor of +1 for every
time zone east of the Prime Meridian and a factor
of -1 for every time zone west.
Trajectory:
A series of consecutive vectors between a base
station (site occupation) and a rover over a given
time span.
Trajectory Name:
A trajectory will have a name that is derived from
its site and rover names with a hyphen separating
them. The site name with its occupation number in
brackets are first, followed by the rover name (For
example, SiteA (02)-RoverC [01]).
Transformation:
The conversion of one type of coordinate system
to another. The transformation of one type of
coordinate system to a coordinate system of the
same type is defined as a datum transformation

Spectrum Survey

Glossary of Terms & Acronyms

(ellipsoidal to ellipsoidal) or a plane
transformation (rectangular to rectangular). A
transformation between two different coordinate
systems (ellipsoidal to rectangular) is defined as a
coordinate transformation which usually contains
some variation of a projection.
Tropospheric Model:
The atmospheric correction algorithm used to
account for the delay of GPS signals due to
barometric pressure.
Undulation:
See geoidal height on Page B-9.
Unhealthy:
State in which a satellite is not used in Visibility
Data computation.
Variance Factor:
The standard deviation of the unit weight value
squared.
VDOP:
See dilution of precision (DOP) on Page B-3.
Vector:
A solution between two single observations (one
epoch) from different observation files.
Vector Name:
A vector will have a name that is derived from the
two site names with a hyphen separating them.
The site names will appear alphabetically, and will
include the site occupation number related to the
vector in question (For example, BaseA - RemoteB
Occ. [02]).
Vector-Occupation:
pair of simultaneous site occupations that define a
vector.

Spectrum Survey

Appendix B
Vertical Offset:
An information field in the Antenna Editor dialog
indicating the phase center vertical offset for a
selected antenna.
Visibility Data:
Contains the epoch. For visible satellites this data
also contains the azimuth and elevation with
respect to the selected site and the satellites
Cartesian co-ordinates (X,Y,Z).
Wavelength:
The distance between two identical and successive
positions on a radio wave (i.e., crest to crest). The
L1 carrier has a wavelength of approximately
19cm; L2 is approximately 24cm.
Weight:
A method of assigning a numerical value to a
vector indicating the amount of error inherent or
allowable to the vector. Weight can be used a
measure of accuracy for specific vectors.
WGS84 Coordinates:
World Geodetic System (1984); the ellipsoidal
coordinate system used by GPS.
Widelane:
A particular integer ambiguity value on one
carrier phase range measurement or doubledifference carrier phase observation when the
difference of the L1 and L2 measurements is used.
It is a carrier phase observable formed by
subtracting L2 from L1 carrier phase data: = 1
- 2. The corresponding wavelength is 86.2 cm.
Zoom factor:
Magnification factor giving the relation between
logical units (such as device pixels to real world
units (such as meters). Does not bind physical
units (screen pixels) to real world units directly.

B-9

Index
A
accuracy 14-10
additional resources 1-8
adjust a network 12-1
adjustment
apply settings 12-6
calculating 12-14
coordinates and standard deviations 13-10
ellipsoid 14-9
error log 13-19
exporting 14-9
general tab 12-8
input coordinates and corrections 13-9
localized tab 12-11
minimally constrained 12-5
network 12-1, 12-16
observations and residuals 13-14
output 14-9
overview of process 12-1
process 12-14
relative precision 13-16
reliability of observations 13-14
reports 13-4
results 13-1
settings 12-9 to 12-11
shortcut menus 3-4
tab, project settings 5-6
transformation into map coordinates 13-11
viewing residuals 12-16
adjustment tab 5-6
alarm 3-13
ambiguity 9-28

Spectrum Survey

analyzing
adjustment results 13-1
observation files 10-6
points 10-11
process results 10-1
residuals 13-19
trajectories 10-21
vectors 10-12
angle, mask 9-22
antenna
add 3-17
delete 3-17
imported data 6-5
list 3-16
measured height 8-25
model 3-15
new occupation 8-10
NGS ID 8-19
offset 3-17
options 3-12
rover 8-20
summary 10-15
trajectory 10-25
vertical height 8-19
area 9-22
ASCII file, point data 10-11
attribute 9-9
average 8-15, 14-20
averaging 8-11

B
baardas data snooping technique 13-8

I-1

Index
bar
menu 3-1
status 3-4
title 3-7
base
definition 1-7
name 10-15
new trajectory 9-20
occupations 2-3
overlap 3-20
point 10-15, 10-25
selecting trajectories 9-33
summary 10-3
trajectory 9-19, 10-25
vector summary 10-15
without a 9-26
baseline solution codes 14-4
basic operations 3-1
before adjusting your data 12-4
blunder detection tab 5-7
broadcast orbit 6-1

C
calculating adjustments 12-1, 12-14
cartesian 10-16, 14-10
change regional settings 12-6
close reports 3-24
closures, perform loop 11-2
codes, baseline solution 14-4
colors, processing 9-35
combinations, define point & rover 9-2
communications 4-1
configuration 8-20
constrained adjustment, minimally 12-5
controls, view 3-9
convention
documentation 1-6
naming 8-8
coordinate export 14-25
coordinate system, edit 8-1
coordinates/time tab 5-5

I-2

correction, horizontal 12-11

corrupted 3-12, 10-17
covariance 10-16, 12-13, 14-10
create a new project 5-2
customize 3-11
cycle slip 10-10

D
data
before adjusting 12-4
editing 8-1, 8-6
importing 5-14, 6-1
managing 5-1
new vector 9-13
processing 9-1
reviewing 12-14
select raw 8-23
selecting 3-11
troubleshooting 11-1
data files 9-13
data snooping technique 13-8
datum 10-26
define point & rover combinations 9-2
delete
antenna 3-17
project 5-16
toolbar button 3-18
desktop, learn the 3-1
destination directory, select a 4-3
detection tab, blunder 5-7
device
select 4-3
transfer options 4-3
utilities 4-5
differential 10-29
disk/memory settings 4-5
display graphics 3-8
documentation conventions 1-6

Spectrum Survey

Index

E
edit
coordinate system 8-1
data 3-11, 8-1, 8-6
existing project 5-15
plan view 5-13, 8-2
report 3-23
session time 8-21
editing, by data snooping 13-8
editor
point 8-6
rover 8-20
vector 13-8
elevation mask 10-7
ellipsoid 10-25 to 10-26, 14-9
ellipsoidal height 10-2, 10-15
ephemeris
file 7-2, 10-7, 10-10, 10-17
import new 6-4
rinex v2 6-6
ephemeris tab 6-15, 10-30
epoch
exporting trajectories 14-12
pdop cutoff 9-26
satellite 10-10
solution type 14-17
time tag 14-17
trajectory 14-16

error
disk 9-34, 10-3 to 10-4, 10-17
fatal 10-17 to 10-18
invalid file type 6-12
L1/L2 only data 10-8
multipath 9-22
new trajectory 9-20
observation file 10-3
occupation failure 10-3
out of memory 10-3 to 10-4
point position 10-26
security key 1-4
space 9-34
trajectory failure 10-4
vector 9-14, 10-3, 10-16
error log 13-19
error reporting options 10-28
existing project
edit 5-15
open 5-12
exit 1-4
export
coordinate 14-25
point solutions 14-13
records 14-5
results 13-1, 14-1
trajectory points 14-2
trajectory solutions 14-11
vector solutions 14-2
your results 14-1
export file, generation 14-6

F
file
observation 6-13, 8-21, 10-5, 10-17 to 1018
open report 3-23
transfer 4-4

Spectrum Survey

I-3

Index
file format
iob 14-8
pdc 6-16
sdr 5-13, 14-6 to 14-8
filter
exporting 14-19
file 6-6
mode 10-22
point 14-20
pseudorange 14-17
residuals 10-20
satellite 10-27
save as 14-6, 14-8
trajectory 9-15, 10-22, 14-12
vector 9-6, 10-13, 14-2
fix a point 12-5
fixed
L1 10-7
point 12-5, 12-14
reference coordinate 8-10
solution 9-28
float 9-28, 10-7, 14-4
flow, general work 2-1

G
general tab
see adjustment settings
see project settings
general work flow 2-1
generate reports 3-22, 12-16
geoid 14-8
geolab 14-7
GPS receiver 5-14, 6-1, 10-12
graphical selection 11-2
graphics, display 3-8

I
import
data into a project 6-1
new observations & ephemeris 6-4
process 6-11
types 6-12
install 1-2
interpret
reports 13-3
the table 11-5
inverse matrix 12-13
iob format 14-7 to 14-8
iono-free 9-28
IrDA 4-1

K
key, security 1-4
kinematic 6-2, 6-5, 6-13

L
L1/L2 9-28, 10-7 to 10-8, 10-10, 14-4, 14-17
layers 3-8
list, point 10-10
lock, loss of 10-10
log, error 13-19
loop closures 11-2
loss of lock 10-10

M
manage
adjustment reports 13-1
data 5-1
manually processing 9-1

H
help, on-line 1-7
horizontal correction 12-11
humidity 8-20

I-4

Spectrum Survey

Index
mapping system
at specified epoch 14-18
attributes tab 9-10
coordinates 3-5, 8-12, 14-18
exporting 14-13
name field 3-5
point 8-12, 8-14, 14-21
selection 8-1
trajectory 10-25
vector 9-10, 10-15
mask angle 9-22
mask, elevation 10-7
matrix, inverse 12-13
memory, out of 10-17
menu
adjustment shortcut 3-4
processing shortcut 3-3
menu bar 3-1
meteorological
defaults 8-10, 8-20
imported data 6-5
measures 10-25
output 7-2
point information 10-15
minimally constrained adjustment 12-5
model, tropospheric 9-26

N
naming convention 8-8
narrowlane 9-28
navigating in plan view 3-1
network adjustment
calculate the 12-14
how to 12-1
quick start 2-2
reports 13-4
network, work with 12-1
new project, create 5-2
number of observed satellites plot 10-6

Spectrum Survey

number of satellites
export 14-18
view 10-6

O
objects for processing, select 9-31
observation file
antenna height 8-20
converting to RINEX V2 7-1
duration 8-29
end time 8-9, 8-21
error 10-3
id 6-13, 8-9, 8-25, 9-8
importing 6-5
name 6-13
new 8-10
number of satellites 10-7
output 7-2
playback controls 10-5
remove 6-2, 8-7
rover 9-20
satellite 10-9 to 10-10
session time 8-22
start time 8-9, 8-29
summary 10-6
tab 6-1
time span 8-9, 8-18
tools 5-14
trajectory 10-25
vector 9-4, 10-15
observations
raw 10-4
observations, raw 10-4
observed satellites 10-6, 10-9 to 10-10
observed satellites plot 10-9

I-5

Index
occupations
add new 8-8 to 8-9
adjustment 9-11 to 9-12
antenna 8-10, 8-18, 8-24 to 8-25
base point 9-4
combinations 2-3
defined by observation file 6-14
duration 8-24
edit 8-16
end time 8-9, 8-18
exporting 14-2, 14-5 to 14-6, 14-8
failure 10-3
file id 8-25
height 8-19 to 8-20
invalid time 9-14
list 8-7
meteorological measures 8-20
minimum overlap 3-19
moving 8-7, 8-17
new, trajectory 9-19
new, vector 9-7
number 8-24, 9-19
observation file ID 8-18
observations 6-14
overlap 3-20, 9-8
point 8-10, 10-12
records 14-3
rover 10-4
selection 8-23
single-point averaging 8-11
start time 8-18
summary 10-2 to 10-3
tab 8-16
trajectory 8-15, 9-4, 10-25, 14-20
vector 9-32, 10-15, 14-4
view rover 8-21
on-line help 1-7
open
existing project 5-12
report files 3-23
operations, basic 3-1

I-6

options
device transfer 4-3
error reporting 10-28
tab 12-11
tools 3-12
options tab, see adjustment settings
orbit, broadcast 5-14, 6-1, 10-17
out of memory 10-17
overlap
combinations 3-20
occupation 8-9, 8-18
occupations 2-3
trajectory 9-17
vector 9-4, 9-8

P
parameters, process 9-20
pdc format 6-16
perform loop closures 11-2

Spectrum Survey

Index
plan view
blank 3-6
colors and symbols 3-7
customize 8-2
define combinations 9-4
edit the 8-2
existing project 5-13
importing data 6-12
layers 3-8
learn the 3-7
menu 3-2
navigating in 3-1
new project 5-2
options 3-13 to 3-14
printing 3-24
quick start 2-3
rover editor 8-20
screen and menu layout 3-6
selecting in 8-23, 9-31
show 3-10
symbols 8-6
trajectory editor 9-14
update 9-34
vector editor 9-6
zoom 3-9
plot
number of observed satellites 10-6
observed satellites 10-9
print 3-24
raw analysis 10-7
residuals 10-19
scale 3-14

Spectrum Survey

point
adjustment 8-12
coordinate section 8-12
coordinate solutions 14-19
coordinate source 8-15
editor 8-6
export 14-2, 14-25
fix 12-5
importing 6-12
list 8-14, 10-10 to 10-11, 14-21
new coordinate 6-12
selection 8-23
single 10-29
solutions, export 14-13
point & rover combinations, define 9-2
point and vector data, review 12-14
position format 14-25
post-process 2-3, 9-1, 10-7, 14-8
precise ephemeris 9-22, 10-17
prepare to adjust 12-4
prerequisites, system and windows 1-2
print 3-24
printer setup 3-24
printing 3-24
prn format 9-23, 10-19, 10-27
process
colors 9-35
data 9-1
interval 9-25, 9-30, 10-26
manual 9-1, 9-34
parameters 9-20
results, analyze 10-1
select objects for 9-31
select raw data for 8-23
shortcut menus 3-3
solution types 9-28
summary 10-1
values, reset 9-25

I-7

Index
project
area in plan view 3-7
create new 5-2
edit existing 5-15
edit settings 5-13
exporting 13-1
file 3-5, 5-13, 5-15, 10-15, 10-24
import data 6-1
open existing 5-12
save 5-14
startup 5-10
projection 9-10, 10-16
pseudorange 9-29

Q
quick start 2-1 to 2-2

R
raw data
edit 8-6
select 8-23
raw observations 10-4
receiver 5-14, 6-1, 8-15, 10-12, 14-20
redundant vectors 13-7, 13-15
reference
point 14-9
single-point averaging 8-11
refining data 2-3
regional settings, change 12-6
rejected satellites 9-23 to 9-24
reporting options 10-28
reports
adjustment 13-1, 13-4
closing 3-24
editing 3-23
generating 3-22, 12-16
interpreting 13-3
managing 3-21
opening 3-23
residuals 13-17
saving 3-22

I-8

reset processing values 9-25

residuals
analyzing 13-19
file 10-1
histogram 14-9
plot 10-19 to 10-20
project editor 5-16
reports 13-17, 13-19
standardized 13-17
trajectory 9-23, 10-22, 10-27
troubleshooting with 13-7
vector 9-23, 10-12
view 12-16
viewing 12-16
warning 10-17
resources, additional 1-8
results
analyzing adjustment 13-1
analyzing process 10-1
exporting 14-1
trajectory 10-21
vector 10-12
review point and vector data 12-14
RINEX V2 6-6
RMS 9-11, 14-4

Spectrum Survey

Index
rover
at specified epoch 14-18
combinations, define 9-2
deselection 8-26
duration 8-29
editor 8-20
end time 8-21
exporting 14-11
file 6-2, 6-13, 10-12
ignore 9-27
name 8-29, 9-19
new trajectory 9-20
observation 2-2
overlap 3-20
point list 10-26
project editor 5-16
record 8-29
selection 8-28
show 3-10
start time 8-21, 8-29
status 6-2
summary 10-4
trajectory 9-4, 10-25, 14-20
velocity 14-18

S
satellite
unhealthy 9-24
satellites
number of 10-6, 14-18
observed 10-9
rejected 9-23
satellites plot, number of observed 10-6
satellites plot, observed 10-9
save
project 5-14
reports 3-21 to 3-23
scale
bar 3-7, 3-9, 3-14
difference 12-11
sdr format 14-5 to 14-7

Spectrum Survey

security key 1-4, 10-7

select
data 3-11
destination directory 4-3
device 4-2 to 4-3
objects for processing 9-31
raw data for processing 8-23
zoom box mode 3-9
session time
current 8-9
dialog 8-22
edit 8-21
last processed 10-13
occupations 8-16, 8-23
rover 8-21, 8-28, 9-20
selection 8-22
single-point averaging 8-11
trajectory 9-15, 9-18 to 9-19
trajectory selection 10-22
vector 9-7, 9-13, 10-13
settings
adjustment 12-6
disk/memory 4-5
project 5-13
regional 12-6
standard weight 12-9
weight 12-12
setup, printer 3-24
shortcut menu
adjustment 3-4
displayed satellites 10-20
edit option 8-6
general 3-3
point list 10-11
print 3-24
processing 3-3
raw observation 10-5, 10-7
rover editor 8-20
trajectory 9-15, 10-21
vector 9-6, 10-13
sigma 10-16, 10-26
single pt. average 10-12
I-9

Index
single-point
averaging 8-11, 8-15, 10-12, 14-20
point 9-26
summary 10-2
trajectory 9-26, 10-4
slip, cycle 10-10
snooping technique, baardas data 13-8
Sokkia 1-5
solution codes, baseline 14-4
solution types
differential 9-26
exporting 14-4, 14-13
for epoch 14-17
post-processing 10-7
processing 9-28
ratio 10-3
trajectory 10-26, 14-17
vector 8-15, 9-11, 10-16, 14-20
spr format 5-13, 14-8
standard deviations
coordinates 14-18
L1/L2 carrier measurements 9-30
position 14-12
pseudorange 9-29
velocity 14-12
weight 12-13
standard weight, see weight
start spectrum survey 1-3
startup, project 5-10
static
fields 8-9
file 6-2, 6-13
observation 6-14
occupation 10-12
text message 8-15
trajectory 8-15, 14-20
vector 14-4
status bar
overview 3-4
plan view 3-5, 3-7
show 3-9
trajectory 10-22
I-10

status, card 4-6

subsidiaries 1-5
summary
file 10-1
point 10-2
process 10-1
save 10-4
trajectory 10-3, 10-21, 10-23 to 10-24, 1026
vector 10-2, 10-12, 10-14 to 10-15, 10-17
support, technical 1-5
symbols 3-14, 8-6
system and windows prerequisites 1-2
system, edit coordinate 8-1

T
table, interpret 11-5
technical support 1-5
temperature 8-20
time
edit session 8-21
format 10-2, 10-11, 14-17
tag 6-13, 8-9, 14-11, 14-17
zone 3-12, 3-15, 10-15, 10-24
title bar 3-7
toolbar 3-4
tools, observation file 5-14
trajectory
edit 9-4
export 14-11, 14-16
residuals 10-27
results 10-21
show 3-10
site 9-33
solution types 14-17
solutions, export 14-11
summary 10-23
trajectory points 14-1 to 14-2
transfer 4-3
tropospheric model 9-26
troubleshoot data 11-1

Spectrum Survey

Index

U
undulation 14-8
unhealthy satellite 9-24
utilities, device 4-5

V
vector
data snooping 13-8
edit 9-4
export 14-2
redundant 13-7, 13-15
residuals 10-18
results 10-12
review 12-14
show 3-10
summary 10-12, 10-14 to 10-15
velocity
rover 14-18
standard deviations 14-12
view
controls 3-9
residuals 12-16

W
warning 10-17, 10-26
weight
contribution 13-15
covariance matrix 12-13
inverse matrix 12-13
setting standard 12-9
settings, apply 12-12
standard deviation 12-13
widelane 9-28
windows prerequisites 1-2
work flow, general 2-1
working with a network 12-1

Z
zoom 3-6, 3-9

Spectrum Survey

I-11

SOKKIA JAPAN, HEAD OFFICE - http://www.sokkia.co.jp/english/sokkia.htm

SOKKIA CO. LTD. INTERNATIONAL DEPT.
260-63, Hase, Atsugi-si, Kanagawa, 243-0036 Japan
Phone +81-46-248-7984 Fax +81-46-247-1731

SOKKIA NORTH AMERICA - http://www.sokkia.com

SOKKIA U.S.A.
16900 W 118th Terr, Olathe, Kansas, 66061 U.S.A.
Phone +1-913-492-4900 Fax +1-913-492-0188

SOKKIA CANADA
1050 Stacey Court, Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 2X8 Canada
Phone 1-905-238-5810 Fax 1-905-238-9383

SOKKIA EUROPE/RUSSIA - http://www.sokkia.net/ (for UK, http://www.sokkia.co.uk)

SOKKIA B.V., Dutch Market
Businesspark De Vaart, Damsluisweg 1, 1332 EA Almere, P.O. Box 1292, 1300 BG Almere, The Netherlands
Phone +31-36-53.22.880 Fax +31-36-53.26.241

SOKKIA LTD.
Datum House, Electra Way, Crewe Business Park, Crewe, Cheshire, CW1 6ZT United Kingdom
Phone +44-1270-25.05.25 Fax +44-1270-25.05.33

SOKKIA B.V., Niederlassung Deutschland

An der Wachsfabrik 25, 50996 Kln (Rodenkirchen), Germany
Phone +49-2236-39.27.60 Fax +49-2236-6.26.75

SOKKIA S.R.O.
Skroupovo nmest 1255/9, 130 00 Praha 3, Czech Republic
Phone +420-2-2272 6010 Fax +420-2-2272 6159

SOKKIA S.A.
Rue Copernic, 38760 Chasse-sur-Rhne, France
Phone +33-4-72.492.640 Fax +33-4-72.492.646

SOKKIA S.R.L.
Via Alserio 22, 20159 Milano, Italy
Phone +39-02-66.803.803 Fax +39-02-66.803.804

SOKKIA N.V./S.A.
Doornveld, Asse 3, Nr.11-B1, 1731 Zellik (Brussels) Belgium
Phone +32-2-466.82.30 Fax +32-2-466.83.00

SOKKIA KFT.
Lgszeszgyr u.17., 7622 Pcs, Hungary
Phone +36-72-226.636 Fax +36-72-324.636

SOKKIA MEXICO, CENTRAL AND SOUTH AMERICA - http://www.sokkia.com/worldwide.htm

SOKKIA LATIN AMERICA CORPORATION
2232 NW 82nd Avenue, Miami, FL33122, U.S.A.
Phone +1-305-599-4701 Fax +1-305-599-4703

SOKKIA AUSTRALIA/NEW ZEALAND - http://www.sokkia.com.au

SOKKIA PTY. LTD.
Rydalmere Metro Centre, Unit 29, 38-46 South St., Rydalmere, NSW 2116 Australia
Phone +61 2 9638 2400 Fax +61-2-9638-3933

SOKKIA KOREA - http://www.sokkia.co.kr/

SOKKIA KOREA CO. LTD.
2Fl. Chungam Bldg, 129-11, Chungdam-dong, Kangnam-ku, Seoul, Republic of Korea
Phone +82-2-514-0491 Fax +82-2-514-0495

SOKKIA SINGAPORE/AFRICA/MIDDLE EAST/INDIA - http://www.sokkia.com.sg/

SOKKIA SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.
401 Commonwealth Drive, #06-01 Haw Par Technocentre, Singapore 149598
Phone +65-6479-3966 Fax +65-6479-4966

SOKKIA (M) SDN. BHD.

Dataran Prima, No.31-3, Jalan PJU 1/42A, 47301 Petaling Jaya, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia
Phone +60-3-78052197 Fax +60-3-78054069

SOKKIA PAKISTAN (PVT.) LTD.

Suite #A-2, 4th Floor, Westland Trade Centre, 4th Floor C-5, Central Commercial Area Blook 7 & 8, K.C.H.S.U. Ltd. Shaheed-e-Millat Road,
karachi, Pakistan
Phone +92-21-4313151 / 3 Fax +92-21-4313154

SOKKIA INDIA PVT. LTD.

C-25, 2nd Floor, Sector-8, Noida-201301, India
Phone +91-11-8-4525781 Fax +91-11-8-4525769

SOKKIA GULF
P.O.Box 4801, Dubai, U.A.E.
Phone +971-4-368539 Fax+971-4-3368549

SOKKIA RSA PTY. LTD.

P.O. Box 7998, Centurion, 0046 Republic of South Africa
Phone +27-12-663-7999 Fax +27-12-663-7998

SOKKIA SHANGHAI - http://www.sokkia.com.cn/

SOKKIA CO., LTD. SHANGHAI REP. OffIce
11F No.8, Tower 1 Kerry Everbright City, 218 Tian Mu Road West, Shanghai, #200070 Peoples Republic of China
Phone +86-21-63541844 Fax +86-21-63172083